JP2020178808A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with increased interest.SOLUTION: A zone display 57AK003 indicating that a display change high probability zone is on the upper part of an image display device 5 is displayed, and is controlled to the display change high probability zone. When shifting to the display change high probability zone, the display mode of a specific display is easily changed. Further, even after the display change high probability zone is completed, a change timing of the specific display is provided. The specific display whose display mode has changed before the display change high probability zone is completed, the display mode is changed more easily even after the display change high probability zone is completed than the specific display in which the display change is not changed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A game machine that executes a special zone effect related to a hold display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-137126

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced after the special zone production is completed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with improved interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can display a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
Specific effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the special effect is executed.
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed (. For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
further,
A game control microcomputer that executes a setting value change process in step S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. 100 CPU 103, etc.) and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect over a specific period.
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until the specific timing in the specific period, and then continues to suggest the control of the advantageous state as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to execute one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed (for example, FIG. 12). See -12).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the production will be diversified and the interest will be improved. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing, it is possible to improve the game interest.

(2) Alternatively, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can display a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
Specific effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the special effect is executed.
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed (. For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
further,
A game control microcomputer that executes a setting value change process in step S6A, which can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. 100 CPU 103, etc.) and
It is provided with an effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect over a specific period.
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then terminates the suggestion, and a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing. Of the second suggestion effect, which is continuously performed and suggests the setting of the setting means, any suggestion effect can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 12-13).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the production will be diversified and the interest will be improved. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after the specific timing, the game entertainment can be improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
A change suggestion effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. 10-1 (C) or the like) suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes between when the specific effect is executed and when the specific effect is not executed. The execution rate of the image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be different (for example, the change suggestion effect may be executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed.
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (see, for example, FIG. 10-7).
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following gaming machines (6) to (12). Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines in which set values can be set, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there has been an effect of suggesting set values. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the effect suggesting the set value is not related to other effects, and it may be difficult to improve the game interest. In view of this point, the improvement of the game interest is improved. There is a need to provide gaming machines that make it possible.

(6) A plurality of set values (for example, 1) that are game machines (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player and have different advantages for the player. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect over a specific period with a setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A). The effect executing means is provided with various effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.), and the effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then the specific timing. As the effects that can be performed thereafter, the first suggestion effect that continuously gives suggestions regarding the control of the advantageous state and the first suggestion effect that continuously gives suggestions regarding the control of the advantageous state and makes suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means. Of the two suggestive effects, any of the suggestive effects can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 12-12).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing.

(7) Alternatively, a plurality of set values (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player and have different advantages for the player (for example, a plurality of set values). A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, 1 to 6) (for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value changing process in step S6A) and a suggestion effect over a specific period. An effect execution means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) is provided, and the effect execution means makes suggestions regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. Of the first suggestion effect for ending the above and the second suggestion effect for continuously performing the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing and suggesting the setting of the setting means. Is feasible (see, eg, FIG. 12-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after a specific timing. Can be done.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the specific period may be included in at least an execution period of variable display (for example, a period after timing T2) in which reach effect can be executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

(9) In the game machine according to (6) or (8), as the reach mode of the variable display, a plurality of types of reach modes (for example, reach symbols 1 to 7) having different ratios controlled to the advantageous state are included. The effect executing means may be able to change the reach mode to a specific mode (for example, the symbol display color is copper, silver, gold, etc.) after the variable display becomes the reach mode.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

(10) In the gaming machine according to (6), (8) or (9), the effect executing means has a different mode of effect (for example, a setting suggestion pattern) depending on the setting of the setting means after the specific timing. It may be possible to execute an effect according to the patterns RE-0 to RE-3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

(11) In the game machine of the above (7), the effect executing means changes the effect mode stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages, and as the number of stages in which the effect mode is changed increases, the advantageous state is obtained. It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a step-up notice effect) in which the controlled ratio is high.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

(12) In the gaming machine of the above (11), the plurality of stages include an advantageous state notification stage (for example, the fourth step of the step-up notice effect) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled, and the setting means. A setting suggestion stage (for example, the fifth step of the step-up notice effect) is included, and the effect execution means changes the effect mode to the advantageous state notification stage, and then after the specific timing. It is possible to change the effect mode to the setting suggestion stage, and the setting suggestion stage may have a longer execution period than the advantageous state notification stage (see, for example, FIG. 12-11).
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine with the frame for the game machine open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 112IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process executed at the time of power-on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in the setting change processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate, the appearance rate, and the reliability of the notice X of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of another execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate and the appearance rate of the notice Y of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate and the appearance rate of the notice Z of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the feature part 57AK. It is a flowchart which shows the specific display process of the feature part 57AK. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio in the specific display processing. It is a figure which shows the change timing of the display mode of a specific display. It is a figure which shows the display change pattern of the specific display of a feature part 57AK. It is a figure which shows the transition ratio of a zone. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the modification of the feature part 57AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the reach symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion pattern and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the notice type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the step number pattern and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outer frame display pattern and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production pattern of the chance up production. It is a figure which shows the production pattern determination ratio of the chance up effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect pattern of the setting value suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern determination ratio of the setting value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the executable period of the chance up effect and the set value suggestion effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made accordingly. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 112IW)
Next, the feature unit 112IW will be described. The setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 112IW can be changed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose settings can be changed, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values, and it is possible to control the advantageous state (big hit game state) at different rates according to the set set values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the other feature unit may also be configured so that the setting can be changed in the same manner as the feature unit 112IW. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape and a gaming board constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the clerk of the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and the player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 112IW201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, on the main board 11, the setting key 112IW051 for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state described later, and the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the setting change state are changed. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. Although the feature unit 112IW illustrates a form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 112IW201, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the feature unit 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, a substrate including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Further, the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side portion of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the game machine frame 112IW003 from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating the pieces, the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the operation becomes operable.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. While the state is maintained, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The set value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in the game field, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the two and the pachinko game machine 1. And the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may cause fraudulent acts such as changing the setting value. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A switches the setting with the setting key 112IW051. By maintaining the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is regulated, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted, the seal, and the like can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

In the feature unit 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables such as the determination table shown in FIG. 8-4, which is prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and FIG. In addition to the display result judgment table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C), the jackpot type judgment table (not shown), the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table (not shown), and the general drawing. A display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 having the lowest payout rate and increasing values in the order of 1, 2 and 3 increasing the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3 the advantage increases stepwise.

(Display result judgment table)
8-4 (A) to 8-4 (C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. In the case of, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of "2" (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). To do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to 8-4 (C). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to 8-4 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

The feature unit 112IW provides a total of three set values, 1 to 3, as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 2 or 4 or more.

Further, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player (the jackpot probability increases), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this feature unit 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (large winning opening, second major winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform aggregation and calculate various winning information such as a continuous ratio, a winning combination ratio, and a base based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display unit of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments drawing a "8" character and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

The display contents are displayed on the first-digit display unit and the second-digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third-digit display unit and the fourth-digit display unit. In the display No. 1, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 2, the short-term combination ratio is displayed. Display No. 3 displays the total cumulative ratio, and display No. 4 displays the total cumulative combination ratio. Further, in the display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in the display No. 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Will be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for obtaining the total cumulative total means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening in the big hit game state to the total number of prize balls. May be good. Further, the base may be calculated individually for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. "Y7." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. Is displayed with "A7." On the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the one digit is displayed. "B6." Is displayed on the eye display and the second digit display. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When it is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit.

Furthermore, the display of these short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, and the set values set at that time are It is possible to sequentially change the display of short-term consecutive ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

In the feature unit 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this and displays. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only a numerical value of 1 or only a numerical value of any 2 of these ratios, combination ratios, and bases.

In addition, the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of prize balls given, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of prize balls given without calculating the joint ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 112IW will be described. 8-5 to 8-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the feature unit 112IW. In the feature unit 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the effect control means to start for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) starts when the power supply to the game machine is started. Set the timer (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means activation waiting timer is set with a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine to the activation of the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processes after step 112IWS006 are executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and recovery processes are executed. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization specification command, and a recovery command, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is started, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a value at the time of shipment from the factory (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible set value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory default settings are used (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the set value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) by the same process as in step S5, and the data is normal. Whether or not it is determined (step 112 IWS008). In step 112 IWS008, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if a power failure occurs during the setting value change and the power supply to the game machine is restarted, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating that a RAM error has occurred.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (a state in which the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is on, the RAM clear process for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 102 is executed after the process related to the setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120 AKSA03.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (when the door is closed) (N in step 112IWS011) or when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), the clear switch is used. When the output signal of is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process proceeds to the loop process without shifting to the step 120AKSA01. Before entering the loop process, the control of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (the process of step 112IWS010) may be executed.

When the processes of steps 112IWS006 to S013 are executed, the backup RAM is not normal in the feature unit 112IW (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or the settings for factory default are left as they are (step 112IWS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 open. On condition that, the set value after step 120 AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, the process for confirming the setting (setting confirmation process) or the process for changing the setting (setting change) depends on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, on / off of the clear switch). Process) is executed. The error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating that the setting change process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation process is started is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting change command or the setting confirmation command, it controls to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a predetermined image or displays a predetermined image. A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a value at the time of shipment from the factory (for example, “0” or the like) (step 120AKSA06). If it is the factory default setting value (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the set value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). In step 120 AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated to "1".

In step 120AKSA07, when the set value is the factory default value, the set value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other set values may be set as the initial value. Also, when there is a RAM error error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed), the set value is set to the initial value "1". You may try to do it. In this case, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed (when step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM error flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM error flag is set. May be determined whether or not is on.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the process of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08). ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 120AKSA12). The set value is updated every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the set value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the set value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the set value is "3", it is updated to "1". Just update. A specific setting value may be specified by operating the setting changeover switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process related to the setting change is not executed. In this case, or when the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on (step 120AKSA11; No), it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is turned off after the processing of step 120AKSA12 is executed. (Step 120 AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains ON (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. When the set value is updated in step 120AKSA12, the process of step 120AKSA08 is executed again, so that the updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

When the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120AKSA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14; Yes), the setting changing flag is reset (step 120AKSA15), and a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16). ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and the set value command indicating the set value is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). The setting value command may be sent only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA19). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120 AKSA19; Yes), the RAM clear process is executed (step 120 AKSA 20). In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear processing, the area other than the area for storing information for performance display such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the connection ratio and the combination are cleared. Information for performance display such as ratio and base, and information on set values are not cleared and are retained.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S9 (step 112IWS033).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120 AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112 IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped by the same process as in step S6. Do. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 by the same process as in step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to the process of step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

In step 120AKSA08, the set value may be displayed on the image display device 5. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed by using the image display device 5.

Further, during the execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). May be good. By notifying the player using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is preferable. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change processing, the setting change processing is executed again and the updated setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) unless the setting change is completed. , You may make an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is performed at the end of the setting change process. When the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed, if the setting change flag is on, an error occurs. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally in the middle, the clerk of the amusement park may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, it is possible to guarantee the reliable completion of the setting change by setting an error if the setting change is not completed.

Further, in step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, the image display device 5 is displayed with information indicating that an error occurs, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, if all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, or if all the lights are turned on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all the blinking may occur).

FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a process executed when the power is turned on. In this feature unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 8-8, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (furthermore, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step 120AKSA20, etc.) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step 112IWS024) is executed if the clear switch is off. Is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 8-5 to 8-7, branching is performed according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) while sharing some of the processing. In, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process has been executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as an individual process.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. If the big winning opening is being opened during a big hit game or the like at the timing when the power is turned off, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the supply of electric power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set to, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (D), the CPU 103 each time it detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (E), the CPU 103 sets the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the amusement park or the like. Store (update storage) in the backup area of. At this time, the CPU 103 tells the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the set values set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
When the hold storage is stored in the backup area of 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the big prize opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-9 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. As the memory of the jackpot is erased, the jackpot remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state where the game can be played, that is, a state in which the fluctuation display result, the jackpot type, the lottery for determining the fluctuation pattern, the payout of the prize ball, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (F), the CPU 103 displays "EE" on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored. It is possible to make it.

In the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process is the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the feature unit 112IW), or the most advantageous for the player. The set value (“3” in the case of this feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Explanation of feature 53AK)
Subsequently, the feature unit 53AK will be described. The setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 53AK can be changed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose settings can be changed, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values, and it is possible to control the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) at different rates according to the set set values. In the feature unit 53AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect that announces / suggests that the display result will be a big hit (controlled in the big hit game state) during the execution of the variable display.

When the variable display is started, the advance notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 7 depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the setting value, the higher the probability of a big hit. The notice effect (especially the highly reliable notice effect that becomes a big hit) is easy to be executed when the display result becomes a big hit, so if the execution presence or absence is determined at an equal ratio regardless of the set value, the set value The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability refers to the jackpot reliability, and refers to the ratio of jackpots when the advance notice effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a risk that the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may differ from the intended ones due to blurring due to the set value, or the reliability may change and the player may be confused. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 53AK, by adjusting (changing) the execution rate of the advance notice effect according to the set value, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect is in the same or substantially the same range. Adjusted within. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be intended, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the set value from being unnecessarily suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

In addition, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention according to the feature portion 53AK includes not only those having the same appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect but also those adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that if the range is substantially the same, the same effect as in the case of the same can be obtained. The substantially same range may be within a predetermined range, within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect perceived by the player. May be within substantially the same range so that they are perceived to be the same.

FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect of the feature unit 53AK. FIG. 9-1 (A) shows an example in the case where the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three stages of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" when the set value is "1", "1/250" when the set value is "2", and the set value. In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= jackpot probability a × execution ratio b) when the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is “1/600” when the set value is “1” and the set value “2”. In the case of, it is "1/500", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/400".

The loss probability c (= 1-big hit probability a) is "299/300" when the set value is "1", "249/250" when the set value is "2", and "199" when the set value is "3". / 200 ". The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "1/100". Therefore, the rate (ratio to total variation) B (= loss probability c × execution rate d) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a loss is about “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "7/600" when the set value is "1", "6/500" when the set value is "2", and "5" when the set value is "3". It is "/ 400". The reliability D (= A / C) of the notice X is "1/7" (about 14%) when the set value is "1" and "1/6" (about 17%) when the set value is "2". ), When the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution rate of the notice effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the set value without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the case of the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 9-1 (B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), unlike the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1". When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". Further, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "3/299" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 199 ".

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "6/500" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and the advance notice effect can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the advance notice effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value as the notice effect, but a comparison like the notice X among a plurality of types of notice effects is made. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects (that is, some notice effects) that are the highlights, and for other notice effects, the execution ratio is not adjusted, depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of determining whether or not the notice effects are executed is generated. Can be prevented from increasing.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is different, but even if they are the same as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the notice X is different. The rate B that is executed and becomes a loss is "1/100", which is substantially the same for all the set values, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also substantially the same (about 1.17% to 1.25%). , The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be set to the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

FIG. 9-1 (C) shows an example when the appearance rates of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2/249" when the set value is "2", and "1.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in total variation becomes "1/100" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or suggesting the set value unnecessarily depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), the reliability of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated and the set value can also be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve. By matching the appearance rates, the reliability according to the set value may change relatively large (about plus or minus 10%) such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 9-1 (D) shows an example when the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate in the case of a big hit can be maintained.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 9-1 (D), the appearance rate of the notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve.

In FIG. 9-1 (D), the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss different according to the set value. However, by assuming that the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss is the same regardless of the set value and the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a big hit is different according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so as to be. In this way, by making the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of the total variation, common, it is not necessary to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution rate different. The control burden for executing is reduced.

The jackpot probabilities a shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A) to 9 (D) and the adjustment examples of the advance notice execution ratios b and d are examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value, the appearance rate C and the reliability D should be the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. In addition, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is such that the appearance rate C = a × b + (1-a) × d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. At least one of b and d may be adjusted. When the reliability D of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the advance notice effect D = (a × b) / (a × b + (1-a) × d) regardless of the set value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that they are the same (substantially the same).

In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 9-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not taken into consideration, but when there are multiple jackpot types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) is set according to the jackpot type. It may be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-1, and there are normal jackpots and probabilistic jackpots as jackpot types, and when a jackpot is hit, the equal ratio (50%) is one of the jackpot types. explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the probability variation jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 9-1. Then, in this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and the set value "3". In the case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A1 (= normal jackpot probability a1 x execution ratio b1) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a normal jackpot is "1/1000" regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variation big hit is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A2 (= probability variation jackpot probability a2 x execution ratio b2) when the notice X is executed and becomes a probability variation jackpot is "1/1200" when the set value is "1", and the set value " In the case of "2", it is "1/1000", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (ratio to total variation) A (= A1 + A2) at which the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is "44/24000" when the set value is "1" and "48/24000" when the set value is "2". , In the case of the set value "3", it is "54/24000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss is “196 / (299 × 80)” when the set value is “1” and “2” when the set value is “2”. 192 / (249 × 96) ”, and in the case of the set value“ 3 ”, it is“ 186 / (199 × 120) ”. Therefore, the rate at which the notice X is executed and the result is lost (ratio to the total variation) is "196/24000" when the set value is "1", "192/24000" when the set value is "2", and the set value " In the case of "3", it is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B), the appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in total variation is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are multiple jackpot types, by making the execution rate of the notice effect different for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect can be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be. By doing so, when the advance notice effect is executed while the execution rate of the advance notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, the ratio of which jackpot type is used differs depending on the set value. It is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-2, the appearance rate of the notice X was adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X at the time of a normal big hit different, but other big hit types and loss. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the time different. That is, d may be adjusted with at least one of the advance notice execution rates b1 and b2 so that the appearance rate C = a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + c × d of the notice X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by making the execution rate of the notice X different according to the jackpot type. In this case, the reliability D = (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2) / (a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + ((1-a1-a2) × d)) of the advance notice effect is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. As described above, at least one of the advance notice execution ratios b1 and b2 and d may be adjusted. By doing so, the advance notice effect is executed while keeping the reliability of the advance notice effect within the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which jackpot type is selected differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, a probabilistic jackpot) will be obtained by executing the advance notice effect according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects, the execution rate of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution rate regardless of the set value. For example, there are two types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot (50% of the distribution of the jackpot type), and as a notice effect, a notice Y for notifying that the hit will be a probable big hit may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the case of a normal big hit or loss, the execution rate of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Y at the time of the probability variation big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and "40 / 100" when the set value is "3". It is "100". The jackpot probability is the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the total variation notice Y is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice Y notifying that the probability variation jackpot will occur at the time of the probability variation jackpot at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it can be announced that it will be a probable change jackpot regardless of the set value. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the notice Y is executed only at the time of the probability change big hit, so the reliability is 100%.

A notice effect for notifying that it will be a probable big hit may be executed at the time of loss. For example, as a notice effect, when the notice Z for notifying that the probability variation big hit will be executed is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-4, in the case of the normal big hit, the execution rate of the notice Z is 0 regardless of the set value. It becomes / 100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probabilistic big hit is the same as the execution rate of the notice Y shown in FIG. 9-3, and the rate at which the notice Z is executed and becomes a big hit is "1" regardless of the set value. It is "/ 1000". The execution rate d of the notice Z at the time of loss is "3/2990" when the set value is "1", "2.5 / 2490" when the set value is "2", and "2" when the set value is "3". / 1990 ". The ratio B at which the notice Y is executed and the result is lost is "1/1000" in any of the set values.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice Z in total variation becomes "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value and becoming an unintended ratio, and if a big hit occurs, a notice that the probability change big hit will be announced. Z can be preferably performed. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. It should be noted that either the appearance rate of the notice Z or the reliability may differ depending on the set value.

Subsequently, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in 53AK will be described. The lower arrow in FIG. 9-5 (A) indicates that the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" of the image display device 5. It shows that there is. When it is decided to execute the advance notice X as the advance notice effect, the character image 53AK001 as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) is a line saying "chance" during the execution of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Notice X is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state without being aware of the set value. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are stopped, and the reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (D), the characters "Super Reach!" Are displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), the reach effect of the super reach in which the characters confront each other is displayed. To be started. During the reach effect of the super reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (E), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5.

Then, for example, immediately before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (F), the notice Y or the notice Z in which the character image 53AK002 issues the line "probability change !?" is executed. To. As a result, the player expects to be a probabilistic jackpot. In particular, if it is a notice Y, it will be confirmed that it will be a probable change jackpot, so the interest will be improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z can be executed, it is a production that gives a notice and suggests that both of them will be a probabilistic jackpot, but the display color and the lines of the lines are so that the player can distinguish them. It is preferable to make some production modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (G), it is displayed that the ally character has won, and as shown in FIG. 9-5 (H), with the big hit combination. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 9-5 is an example, and any effect mode may be used as long as it can suggest and give notice of a big hit or a probabilistic big hit.

(Modification example of feature part 53AK)
The feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as the set value, but the set value may be 2 stages or less or 4 stages or more (for example, 6 stages). Further, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player, but the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the jackpot probability is for the player. Further, the jackpot probability according to the set value shown in FIG. 9-1 and the like is also an example, and it is sufficient that the jackpot probability is stepwise according to the set value.

In the above embodiment, the execution rate of the advance notice effect is set to the set value so that at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of all the set values (set values 1 to 3) is within the same or substantially the same range. It was changed (adjusted) according to it, but of the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values should be within the same or substantially the same range. You may. For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value (for example, set value 1) and the second set value (for example, set value 2) is within the same or substantially the same range. Good. Further, when the set value is in 6 stages, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or substantially the same range. , At least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect of the second set value group (for example, set values 4 to 6) may be the same or substantially the same range.

In the above embodiment, as the specific effect, the appearance rate and reliability of at least a part of the notice effects are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, but the specific effect is controlled to an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when the type of reach effect and the number of pseudo-reams are determined on the side of the effect control board 12, the type of reach effect and the determination ratio of the number of pseudo-reams are different depending on the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of each reach effect, and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-ream number may be controlled to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

Further, when deciding whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, a table to which different execution ratios are assigned to each set value may be used to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, or to determine the advance notice effect. A reference table may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be calculated in the table, and a table corresponding to the set value may be generated, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed may be determined using the generated table.

The execution rate, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4 are examples, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Further, as the advance notice effect, other advance notice effects other than those shown in the above embodiment may be feasible. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and some or all of the other notice effects may be set to the set value. Regardless, the appearance rate and reliability may be changed according to the set value as the same execution rate. For example, among the notice effects, for the notice effects with relatively high reliability, the appearance rate and reliability are set to be the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. For high notice effects, the same execution rate may be used regardless of the set value. By doing so, the control burden regarding the determination of whether or not to execute the advance notice effect is reduced as compared with the case where the appearance rate and the reliability are the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value for all the advance notice effects. Can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific advance notice effect among a plurality of types of advance notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is another set value, it is not executed (or is executed) if it is lost. It may be difficult). For example, a specific advance notice effect with high reliability (for example, jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (for example, 1 to 3) is not executed. In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of loss. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect by losing even though the specific advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to suggest and notify that the set value is high.

In the figures shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect, but after deciding whether or not to execute the notice effect according to the display result, the type of the notice effect (effect pattern). ) May be determined. In this case, when determining the type of advance notice effect, the execution ratio of each advance notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each advance notice effect are within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. It may be different depending on it.

In the above embodiment, whether or not the advance notice is executed is determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but at the time of loss, depending on the fluctuation pattern (presence / absence and type of reach, presence / absence and number of pseudo-reams), The execution ratio of the advance notice effect may be different.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probabilistic state is not considered, but even in the probabilistic state, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Further, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. For example, in a probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability of a big hit is high and the advance notice effect is easily executed, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Such adjustment may not be performed in the normal state (low probability state). Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect (specific advance notice effect) may be different between different gaming states, or may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. For example, if the background is shared between the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state so that they cannot be distinguished from each other, the advance notice effect (specific advance notice effect) is performed between the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state. ) May be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state in which the appearance is indistinguishable from being recognized depending on the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect.

In the above embodiment, when there are a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value according to the jackpot type. It was. The difference in the jackpot type may be the difference in the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time saving state or the probability variation state controlled by the jackpot gaming state.

When a small hit is provided as a display result and the advance notice effect is executed even when the small hit occurs, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect at the time of a big hit or a loss is made different according to the set value as in the above embodiment. In addition, by making the execution rate of the advance notice effect at the time of a small hit different according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. .. For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in the winning opening that is opened in the small hit game state and the game machine is controlled to the big hit game state based on passing through the specific area in the small hit game state, it is announced that the small hit will be obtained. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect is a big hit, the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect for notifying the small hit may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. In this case, when the small hit probability is changed according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are changed by changing the execution rate of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value. You can adjust the degree. Specifically, by considering the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value, the execution rate of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss is made different according to the set value. The appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

When the advance notice effect can be executed for each of the multiple variations of the pseudo-ream, the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value only for the advance notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-ream. You may. By doing so, it is possible to easily design the notice effect and reduce the processing load as compared with the case of adjusting the appearance rate and the reliability for all the fluctuations of the pseudo-ream.

In the above embodiment, only the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the effect mode and the effect execution ratio may be different depending on the set value on the effect control board 12. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same, different reach effects or effects during variable display such as pseudo-ream may be executed based on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to suggest a set value for the effect mode by the execution rate of the effect.

A part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example according to the feature portion 53AK may be appropriately combined.

(Explanation of means related to feature 53AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 53AK is
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine that can be controlled to (gaming state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 53AK).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has an appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is the first set value and an appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and the rate are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), (C), 9-2 to 9-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed at a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when it is not controlled to the advantageous state different according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), (C), 9-2, 9). -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled in an advantageous state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state different according to the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), 9-2 to 9-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be preferably adjusted.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The ratio (for example, reliability) controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), 9). -3, Fig. 9-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the control is performed in an advantageous state, so that the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed depending on the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (C) and 9-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that it is possible to provide a game playability in which the reliability is estimated, and the interest is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect execution means may make the execution ratio of the specific effect different depending on the set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 54AK)
Further, the feature portion 53AK includes an invention relating to the feature portion 54AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 54AK is
It can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6, etc.), and is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player at a different ratio depending on the set set value. A gaming machine that can be controlled (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 54AK).
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The specific effect executing means has a rate of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed when the set value is the first set value, and a second setting value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the set value is within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIG. 9-1 (Fig. 9-1). B), (D), FIG. 9-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common reliability (ratio controlled to an advantageous state) regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
The specific effect executing means makes the execution ratio of the specific effect when it is not controlled to the advantageous state different according to the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), (D), 9-4). You may.
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled in an advantageous state.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific effect executing means may have different execution ratios of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B) and 9-4). ..
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect can be suitably adjusted.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), 9-3, 9-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the control is performed in an advantageous state, so that the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be changed depending on the set value (for example, FIG. 9-1 (D)).
According to such a configuration, the reliability of the specific effect is adjusted, but the appearance rate changes, so that the interest is improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect execution means may make the execution ratio of the specific effect different depending on the set value for each type of the controlled advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
There are multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be obtained regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest will be improved.

(Explanation of feature 57AK)
Subsequently, the feature 57AK will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 57AK can display a hold display corresponding to the held variable display before execution and an active display corresponding to the variable display during execution as specific displays corresponding to the variable display. In addition, it is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (hold change notice) that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display.

In addition, it is possible to execute a zone effect that shifts to the effect zone, which indicates that the effect state is different from the normal effect state (when the power is turned on, etc.) and is advantageous for the player. During the zone effect, the image display device 5 is displayed to indicate that the zone has been moved to the zone on the effect. The zone effect can be executed over a plurality of variable displays, and can notify that the player is in an advantageous state over the plurality of variable displays. Such a zone effect is also executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect indicating that it is advantageous (high jackpot reliability, etc.) based on the variable display before execution.

In this embodiment, a display change high probability zone indicating that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change is provided as a zone for the effect. The zone effect of the display change high probability zone is also called a specific effect. In the case of the display change high probability zone (during execution of the specific effect), the pending change notice is executed and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the case of not in the display change high probability zone. As a result, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display changes, that is, a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 57AK, by shifting from the display change high probability zone to the normal effect state, the display mode changes in the display change high probability zone even after the display change high probability zone (execution of the specific effect) is completed. The display mode of the specific display is more likely to change due to the execution of the pending change notice than the specific display in which the display mode does not change in the display change high probability zone. As a result, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will change further even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the player's expectations can be suppressed while suppressing the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone. The feeling can be maintained and the interest of the game is improved.

In the feature unit 57AK, in addition to the display change high probability zone as a production zone, a chance zone indicating that the probability of becoming a big hit is high is provided. The zone production of the chance zone is also called a special production. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of zones are provided, and it is possible to shift to any zone as a zone effect. The details of the chance zone will be described later.

FIG. 10-1 is a diagram showing an example of the production operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 57AK. In FIG. 10-1 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 "left", "middle", and "right" by the downward arrow. It shows that there is. The image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 57AK001 for displaying the active display and a hold display area 57AK002 for displaying the hold display. In the hold display area 57AK002, up to four hold displays can be displayed corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and the right side corresponds to the old hold information and the left side corresponds to the new hold information. When the variable display ends and the next variable display is executed, the active display is erased and all specific displays (hold display and active display) are shifted to the right.

In FIG. 10-1 (A), two hold displays are displayed. Here, the active display and the hold display are all displayed as white circles, which is a normal mode. In addition, the zone effect has not been executed, and the effect is normal.

Here, when the game ball enters the winning ball device 6A, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the hold display is increased by one to a total of three. Further, since it is decided to shift to the display change high probability zone here, the zone display 57AK003 indicating that the display change high probability zone is displayed is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and is controlled by the display change high probability zone. To.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss stops and the hold display (specific display) shifts, the image of the star with respect to the second hold display. An effect (change suggestion effect) in which 57AK004 moves and acts (collisions) is executed. In the display change high probability zone, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold display (specific display) of the action target changes (the hold change notice is executed) by such a change suggestion effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, blue.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and the hold display (specific display) shifts, the change suggestion effect is applied to the first hold display. Will be executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (F), the display mode of the hold display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (G), the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and the first hold display shifts to the active display. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (H), the display mode of the active display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, purple.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (I), the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display at the timing when the reach is established in the variable display corresponding to the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (J), the display mode of the active display, which is the target of the change suggestion effect, changes to, for example, red. At this time, the zone display 57AK003 is erased, and the control to the display change high probability zone ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the display change high probability zone ends in the middle of the variable display of the target (variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the execution of the zone effect).

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (K), at the timing of developing to super reach, the display mode of the active display changes to, for example, gold without executing the change suggestion effect.

In this way, when the zone shifts to the display change high probability zone, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change. Therefore, by shifting to the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change or become a big hit. Further, even after the display change high probability zone ends, the change timing of the specific display (FIG. 10-1 (K)) is provided, and the display mode has changed before the end of the display change high probability zone. Is more likely to change the display mode even after the end of the display change high probability zone than the specific display in which the display mode has not changed. As a result, the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Display change Even if it is not in the high probability zone, the hold display notice may be executed and the display mode of the specific display may change. However, the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode has changed when the display change high probability zone is not provided. That is, the number of times the specific display changes is likely to increase during the display change high probability zone. As a result, during the display change high probability zone, many successful experiences such as a change in the display mode of the specific display can be enjoyed, so that the interest in the display change high probability zone can be improved. It should be noted that the specific display whose display mode has changed in the case of the display change high probability zone is more than the specific display in which the display mode has changed even after the display change high probability zone ends. The display mode is easy to change. As a result, the player's disappointment due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the specific display is the shift time of the specific display and the predetermined timing during the active display. Further, in this embodiment, a change suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes is executed. In particular, during the display change high probability zone, it is always executed at all timings where the specific display can change. In addition, in FIG. 10-1, the display mode of the specific display always changes (change succeeds) after the change suggestion effect is executed, but it may not change (change fails). .. That is, there are cases where the change suggestion effect is not good. By doing so, it is possible to effectively incite the change in the display mode of the specific display in the display change high probability zone, and the effect of the effect is improved.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is not executed unless the display change high probability zone is executed. Even when the display change is not in the high probability zone, the change suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect when the zone is not the display change high probability zone may be lower than that when the display change high probability zone is set. For example, by setting the execution rate of the change suggestion effect of Gase when it is not in the display change high probability zone to be lower than that in the case of the display change high probability zone (for example, the change suggestion effect of Gase is not executed), the relative time ratio. May be lowered.

It should be noted that the rate at which the display mode of the specific display changes (success rate) after the change suggestion effect is executed may be different depending on whether the display change high probability zone is not present or not. For example, the success rate may be higher or lower in cases other than the display change high probability zone than in other cases. In addition, a plurality of effect modes of the change suggestion effect may be provided so that the success rate and the rate of the effect mode (number of stages) that change thereafter differ depending on the effect mode of the change suggestion effect. By doing so, the change suggestion effect becomes various, and the player's expectation can be effectively fueled by the change suggestion effect.

Further, when the display change is not in the high probability zone, the execution mode of the change suggestion effect may be different. When it is not the display change high probability zone, the change suggestion effect of a different effect mode may be executed as in the case of the display change high probability zone. By doing so, the effect can be diversified and the effect can be improved.

Regardless of which zone the zone is, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect and the determination rate of the effect mode when the specific display is actually changed may be different. By doing so, in the display change high probability zone, the execution rate of the change suggestion effect is high, and the change suggestion effect of the mode in which the display mode of the specific display changes is high is easy to be executed. In addition, the success rate can be different depending on the presence or absence of the change suggestion effect and the effect mode.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the operation of the specific display process for displaying the specific display of the feature unit 57AK and executing the pending change notice. The specific display process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in, for example, the pre-reading notice setting process in step S161 of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. If the effect operation according to the present invention can be realized, the position (execution timing) of the corresponding display process is not limited to the read-ahead notice setting process.

In the specific display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning prize has been generated due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step 57AKS001). In the process of step 57AKS001, it may be determined whether or not the start-up prize has occurred, for example, by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the start-up prize has been received from the main board 11.

When it is determined that a start-up prize has occurred (step 57AKS001; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the start-up prize and the process of changing the display mode of the specific display (pending change notice) The display change pattern corresponding to the effect mode) is determined (step 57AKS002).

In the process of step 57AKS002, the display result and the variation category (rough classification of the variation pattern, etc.) are pre-read based on the effect control command for specifying the determination result of the look-ahead determination received at the start winning, and the final display mode and display are displayed. The change pattern is determined. In the process of step 57AKS002, the final display mode and the display change pattern are determined to determine whether or not the pending change notice is executed and the effect mode thereof. In this embodiment, a pending change notice in which the display mode changes a plurality of times may be executed between the time when the specific display is displayed and the time when the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends, but the final display mode After determining, the display change pattern (change process) corresponding to the final display mode is determined.

In step 57AKS002, first, the final display mode is determined according to the display result at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-3, for example. In this embodiment, as a display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. 10-3, "white" which is a normal mode before the execution of the change effect and a notice mode which changes due to the pending change notice are used. Display modes of "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are provided. Then, as shown in the determination ratio of FIG. 10-3, the display result (variable category) is different depending on which of "non-reach", "normal loss", "super reach loss", and "big hit". The final display mode is determined. In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-3, there is a possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of (“white” <) “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red” <“gold” <“rainbow”. (Big hit reliability), the possibility of becoming super reach (super reach reliability), and the possibility of establishing reach are high.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are set to "rainbow", respectively. It is also referred to as "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f], and" g ". In this embodiment, a plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided depending on the difference in color, but a plurality of display modes of the specific display may be provided depending on the difference in shape, pattern, motif, and character. That is, the difference between "a" and "g" may be a difference in shape, pattern, motif, or character.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display mode of the specific display remains "white" (when the final display mode is "white"), there is no big hit, and the big hit reliability is 0%. ing. When the display mode becomes "blue", there is a high possibility that reach will be established. When the display mode is "green", at least reach is established. Further, when the display mode is "purple", it is determined that the display mode is "super reach". However, when the final display mode is "blue" to "purple", the jackpot reliability is low.

When the display mode of the specific display is "red", the jackpot reliability is significantly higher (12 times or more) than in the case of "purple" or less. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the display mode is "red" or higher. When the display mode is "gold", the jackpot reliability is higher (60%), and when the display mode is "rainbow", it is confirmed that the jackpot is a big hit. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" is determined only at 7% at the time of big hit (generally 1/300 etc. in the normal state), its appearance rate is low and it is a rare production (premier production). It has become.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is subdivided, and eight stages of display modes are provided. Therefore, when the display change high probability zone is reached, the display mode can be designed to be easily changed (the number of changes is large), and the number of times the display can be changed can be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as the change timing (timing that can change) of the display mode of the specific display, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), seven timings “ho 4” and “ho 3” are used. , "Ho 2", "Ho 1", "A 1", "A 2", "A 3" are provided. "Ho 4" is when it is displayed as the fourth hold display. "Holding 3" is when it is displayed as the third hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "Holding 2" is when it is displayed as the second hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "Holding 1" is when it is displayed as the first hold display (at the time of winning or shifting). "A1" is when it is displayed as an active display (at the time of winning or shifting). "A2" is when it is displayed as an active display, and changes such as the timing of the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol (when the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped due to the establishment of reach, and when all the symbols are temporarily stopped during the pseudo-continuous time). The timing of the first big hit in the middle, etc.). “A3” is when it is displayed as an active display and when it develops into super reach (when the reach production of super reach starts, etc.).

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of change stages and change timings of the specific display are provided. As a result, the frequency with which the display mode of the specific display changes can be increased, and the interest of the pending change notice can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the control to the display change high probability zone is executed at any timing from "maintenance 4" to "a1" and ends at the timing of "a2". To do. Therefore, "A3" is always outside the display change high probability zone. Since "A3" is when developing into super reach, etc., by ending the display change high probability zone before developing into super reach, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated, and pay attention to the reach production of super reach. Can be made to. In addition, two or more change timings may be provided outside the display change high probability zone.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode is determined, the display change pattern is determined according to the determined final display mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display change patterns corresponding to the scenario of the change of the display mode of the specific display at each change timing are provided, and a plurality of display change patterns corresponding to the final change to the final display mode are provided. It is designed to select and decide from the types.

FIG. 10-5 is a diagram showing a part of the display change pattern of the feature portion 57AK. FIG. 10-5 (A) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is b (blue). As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in this embodiment, four types of display change patterns pt2-1, pt2-2, pt2-3, as display change patterns when the final display mode is b (blue). pt2-4 is provided. In FIG. 10-5, the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is shown. For example, the display change pattern pt2-1 is displayed in a (white) from "maintenance 4" to "a1", and indicates that it changes from a (white) to b (blue) in "a2". Further, the display change pattern pt2-4 indicates that "main 4" to "a3" are displayed in b (blue).

When determining the display change pattern, one of the display change patterns is determined regardless of the current number of pending memories (that is, the number of pending display or active display at the time of winning). There is. Therefore, when the display change pattern is determined to be past the change timing when the display mode changes (when the number of reserved memories is less than the change timing when the display mode changes), the specific display is displayed in the changed display mode. Is displayed. In addition, FIG. 10-5 also shows the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display, and the number of changes when the final display mode is b (blue) depends on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern. It will be 0 times or 1 time. For example, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less and the display change pattern pt2-3 is determined, b "blue" is displayed from beginning to end, and the number of changes is 0.

FIG. 10-5 (B) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is c (green). As shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in this embodiment, seven types of display change patterns pt3-1 to pt3-7 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is c (green). .. As shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is c (green), the number of changes is 0 to 2 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5 (C) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is e (red). As shown in FIG. 10-5 (C), in this embodiment, 13 types of display change patterns pt5-1 to pt5-13 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is e (red). .. As shown in FIG. 10-5 (C), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is e (red), the number of changes is 0 to 4 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5 (D) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is g (rainbow). As shown in FIG. 10-5 (D), in this embodiment, 10 types of display change patterns pt7-1 to pt7-10 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is g (rainbow). .. As shown in FIG. 10-5 (D), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is defined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is g (rainbow), the number of changes is 1 to 6 times depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

In FIG. 10-5, the display change patterns when the final display mode is b, c, e, and g are shown, but a plurality of display change patterns when the final display mode is other are also provided. In the process of step 57AKS002, one of the display change patterns as shown in FIG. 10-5 is determined according to the final display mode. The determination rate of the display change pattern may be arbitrary, but may be an equal rate, or may be determined at a different rate depending on the display result. When deciding at different ratios according to the display result, it becomes possible to predict the possibility of a big hit depending on the change timing.

The display change pattern shown in FIG. 10-5 is an example, and a display change pattern other than that shown in FIG. 10-5 may be provided, or the display change pattern shown in FIG. 10-5 may be provided. There may be few types.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode of the specific display and the display change pattern corresponding to the change process of the display mode of the specific display are determined, whether or not the zone effect is executed and the type of zone when the zone effect is executed are determined. (Step 57AKS003). As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of controlling the display change high probability zone is executed as the zone effect. In addition, as a zone different from the display change high probability zone, an effect of controlling the chance zone indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit is also executed. In this embodiment, a normal effect state in which the zone effect is not executed, a display change high probability zone, and a chance zone are provided, and are controlled to any of the zones when the zone effect is executed.

In step 57AKS003, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning prize that has occurred this time. FIG. 10-6 (A) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone. As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), when the number of changes is 5 or 6, the display change is always shifted to the high probability zone, and when the number of changes is 0 or 1, the display changes. It is designed not to move to the high probability zone. Further, when the number of changes is 2 to 4, the larger the number of changes, the higher the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone. By doing so, by being controlled in the display change high probability zone, the rate at which the specific display changes increases, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

The control to the display change high probability zone ends during the variable display (after the change timing "A2") of the pending change notice, but the number of changes does not matter at which timing the display mode changes. The higher the number, the higher the rate of transition to the display change high probability zone, so it is easy to change the specific display that triggered the zone transition during the display change high probability zone, and of course, control to the display change high probability zone. Even after the end of, the rate of change of the specific display (active display) that triggered the zone transition is high. Therefore, even after the control to the display change high probability zone is completed, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the deterioration of the game's interest can be prevented.

It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to whether or not the active display changes at the change timing “A3” outside the display change high probability zone. For example, as the number of changes increases, the rate of shifting to the display change high probability zone is increased, and when the active display changes in "A3", the rate of shifting to the display change high probability zone is further increased. May be good. By doing so, when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the rate of change even after the display change high probability zone ends is high, so that the player's expectation after the display change high probability zone ends. You will be able to maintain the feeling more.

If it is determined in step 57AKS003 to control to the display change high probability zone, the process proceeds to step 57AKS004 without deciding whether to control to the chance zone. That is, in this embodiment, the control to the display change high probability zone is prioritized as the zone effect, and when it is determined whether or not the display change high probability zone is controlled and the display change high probability zone is controlled, the chance zone is set to. It is not controlled. The priority of zone production may be reversed. That is, after determining whether or not to control the chance zone, it may be determined whether or not to control the display change high probability zone when it is determined not to control the chance zone.

If it is decided not to control the display change high probability zone, it is decided whether or not to control the chance zone. In this case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the chance zone according to the final display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning prize generated this time. FIG. 10-6 (B) shows the decision ratio of whether or not to shift to the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), when the final display mode is g (rainbow), it is always shifted to the chance zone, and when the final display mode is f (gold), there is a high probability ( It shifts to the chance zone at 80%), and does not shift to the chance zone when the final display mode is other than those. By doing so, by being controlled by the chance zone, the specific display is likely to change to a mode with high jackpot reliability, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

The display change high probability zone also has a higher jackpot reliability than in the normal production state, but the chance zone has a higher jackpot reliability than the display change high probability zone (finally, the jackpot reliability). It changes to a display mode with a high degree of display). In this way, by providing multiple zones such as a display change high probability zone where the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and a successful experience can be enjoyed, and a chance zone where the jackpot reliability is extremely high, the variation of zone production becomes diverse. The effect of the production is improved, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that although the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case where the chance zone is in the normal production state, the jackpot reliability may be lower than in the display change high probability zone.

Subsequently, the determination results in steps 57AKS002 and 57AKS003 are saved (step 57AKS004), and control for displaying the specific display in the display mode according to the determination result and control for shifting to the zone according to the determination result are executed (step 57AKS004). Step 57AKS005). If the control to move to the zone is executed here, the current zone may be set to the value corresponding to the identifiable zone flag. Further, the control for notifying the shift to the zone may be executed by displaying the image corresponding to the zone to be shifted on the image display device 5 or the like.

When it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 57AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not it is the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006). Since the hold display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step 57AKS006, at the shift timing of the hold display, for example, depending on whether or not an effect control command for specifying the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. It may be determined whether or not there is.

When it is determined that it is the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006; Yes), the control to delete the hold display of the shift source (step 57AKS007) and the control to display the specific display of the shift destination (hold display or active display) Execute (step 57AKS008). At this time, for example, when the display mode changes at the shift destination with reference to the display change pattern, control for changing the specific display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern is also executed. .. Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-1 is also executed. After that, the specific display process is terminated.

After executing the process of step 57AKS005, or when it is determined that it is not the shift timing of the hold display (step 57AKS006; No), it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009). In step 57AKS009, for example, it is determined from the current fluctuation pattern, the value of the timer for measuring the fluctuation time, and the like whether or not the change timing of "A2" and "A3" has come, and the display change pattern is referred to. Then, it may be determined whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed at the reached change timing.

When it is determined that it is the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009; Yes), control is performed to change the display mode of the active display (step 57AKS010). In step 57AKS010, control for changing the active display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern is executed with reference to, for example, the display change pattern. Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggestion effect is also executed.

When it is determined that it is not the change timing of the active display (step 57AKS009; No), or after the processing of step 57AKS010 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011). Here, for example, it is determined from the zone flag whether or not the zone effect is being executed, and the end timing of the zone (for example, the display change high probability zone) is determined from the current fluctuation pattern, the timer value for measuring the fluctuation time, and the like. If it is, it is determined whether or not it is "A2", and if it is a chance zone, it is at the end of the target fluctuation). If it is not the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011; No), the specific display process ends.

If it is the end timing of the zone (step 57AKS011; Yes), the control for ending the zone effect is executed (step 57AKS012), and the specific display process is ended. In step 57AKS012, control such as deleting the image corresponding to the zone from the image display device 5 may be executed.

By executing the specific display process as described above by the effect control CPU 120, the effect of the pending change notice and the zone effect as shown in FIG. 10-1 is realized.

(Modification example of feature part 57AK)
The feature portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above-described embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. Moreover, you may combine this feature part and other feature part as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the zone effect is controlled by either the display change high probability zone or the chance zone, but the display change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (A), when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the display change high probability zone is shown as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (B) and 10-7 (C). The zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is a chance zone may be displayed to indicate that it is a chance zone, and the zone display 57AK005 may be displayed to shift to the chance zone. The timing of transition from the display change high probability zone to the chance zone may be arbitrary, but for example, during the variable display (variable display of the target of the pending change notice) corresponding to the start prize that triggered the transition of the display change high probability zone. , When the display mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage or higher (for example, e or higher). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and it is easy to taste the successful experience. Since the display change high probability zone shifts to the chance zone where the jackpot reliability is extremely high, the variation of the production increases and the interest of the game is enhanced. improves. In addition, the display change high probability zone may be shifted from the chance zone. Further, the zone may be shifted a plurality of times during one zone production. For example, after shifting to the chance zone, the display mode may shift to the display change high probability zone at the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and then shift to the chance zone again.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B)', the zone display 57AK003 indicating that the display change is a high probability zone and the zone display 57AK005 indicating that the display change is a chance zone are both displayed in the two zones. It may be possible to migrate in parallel. By doing so, it is possible to notify that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change and that the jackpot reliability is high, as well as the various effects.

In the above embodiment, the process of changing the display mode of the specific display (the mode of producing the notice of pending change) is determined by selecting and determining the display change pattern, but the determination method is arbitrary, for example. The display mode of the specific display at each change timing may be individually determined each time. Further, in the above embodiment, the shift time of the hold display is the change timing, but the change timing is not limited to this, and the change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be any timing during the variable display.

Further, in the above embodiment, when a plurality of specific displays are displayed, when the hold change notice is executed for one specific display, it is restricted that the hold change notice for the other specific display is executed. Not. Therefore, after the display mode of one specific display is changed, the display mode of another specific display (for example, the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning prize) may change. On the other hand, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the execution of the pending change notice may be restricted for the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning prize. This makes it possible to prevent the specific display and the variable display that should be noted in the display change high probability zone from becoming difficult to understand. In this case, the display mode does not change for the specific display newly displayed in the display change high probability zone after the display change high probability zone ends. On the other hand, the display mode may be further changed for the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone (that is, the specific display that triggered the zone transition). Therefore, it can be said that the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone is more likely to change the display mode than the specific display whose display mode has not changed during the display change high probability zone.

Even after the display change high probability zone (specific effect) is completed, the specific display in which the display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone is different from the specific display in which the display mode has not changed in the display change high probability zone. In addition to the fact that the display mode is likely to change, the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone changes more frequently, and the display mode does not change during the display change high probability zone. The specific display does not change at all, and the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone may change. In addition, the specific display in which the display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone also includes a tendency that the display mode changes more frequently than the specific display in which the display mode does not change in the display change high probability zone.

Display change In the high probability zone, the display mode of a plurality of specific displays may be changed. For example, it may be difficult to tell which is the target by changing the specific display other than the specific display (target specific display) corresponding to the start winning that triggered the transition to the high probability zone of display change to "blue". .. At that time, a hold change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time, or a change suggestion effect suggesting that a plurality of specific displays change at the same time (for example, an effect is applied to the entire hold display area or an image acts on the effect). May be executed. In this case, a plurality of specific display changes may be successful, or only one may be changed. Further, the pending change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time may be executed only in the display change high probability zone, or may be executed in a normal state not in another zone or zone production. Good.

In the above embodiment, there is only one type of display change high probability zone, but there may be a plurality of types of display change high probability zones. For example, a weak display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the normal state and a strong display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than the weak display change high probability zone are provided. You may. In this case, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be different to indicate which display change high probability zone. For example, the blue zone display 57AK003 may be used in the weak display change high probability zone, and the red zone display 57AK003 may be used in the strong display change high probability zone. Then, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone. When shifting from the weak display change high probability zone to the strong display change high probability zone, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that each is a display change high probability zone, and it is possible to notify that the degree of expectation has changed. Further, as the types of the display change high probability zone, there may be a display change high probability zone in which the probability that the specific display changes is high and a display change high probability zone in which the number of times the specific display changes tends to increase.

When a plurality of types of display change high probability zones are provided, it may be possible to shift between each display change high probability zone and the chance zone. For example, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone, and then the chance zone may be shifted. Further, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone, and then the strong display change high probability zone may be shifted. Further, the zone may be restricted not to shift in a specific route, or an effect of branching the route (an effect indicating which zone to shift to) may be executed.

In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect is such that the star image 57AK004 acts on the specific display, but the effect mode of the change suggestion effect is not limited to this, and a predetermined image such as a character image is displayed. It may be such that the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the sound, the operation of the lamp, the movable body, or the like. Further, the effect mode (effect device) of the change suggestion effect may be different depending on whether or not the zone is being produced and which zone it is.

In the above embodiment, the zone displays 57AK003 and 57AK005 notify that the zone effect is being executed and which zone is controlled, but the background and sound in the image display device 5 The zone may be notified by the operation of a lamp or a movable body. Further, the background image may be greatly different depending on the zone, the zone type may be displayed in the display area of the specific display (active display area 57AK001, hold display area 57AK002), or the display mode and color of the display area of the specific display may be displayed. May be different depending on the zone.

Further, a sub display device (sub liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 is provided to display the zone type on the sub liquid crystal, or the sub liquid crystal is movable to notify the zone type according to the operation and position of the sub liquid crystal. You may. Further, the display position, display size, and animation mode (update speed, operation speed, operation direction, etc.) of the specific display may be different depending on the type of zone. The zone notification methods as described above may be any one or may be arbitrarily combined.

A part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example according to the feature portion 57AK may be appropriately combined. Further, the invention relating to the feature portion 57AK and the invention relating to another feature portion may be appropriately combined.

For example, by combining the invention related to the feature unit 57AK with the invention related to the feature units 53AK and 54AK, the appearance rate and reliability of the pre-reading notice effect (pending change notice, zone effect) of the present application are the same or abbreviated regardless of the set value. The execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect may be adjusted according to the set value so as to be within the same range.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 57AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature unit 57AK is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to variable display.
A change effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) that changes the display mode of the specific display.
It is provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone effect of a display change high probability zone).
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
Even after the specific effect is completed, the specific display whose display mode has changed when the specific effect has been executed is displayed more than the specific display whose display mode has not changed when the specific effect has been executed. The mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A change suggestion effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. 10-1 (C) or the like) suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes between when the specific effect is executed and when the specific effect is not executed. The execution rate of the image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be different (for example, the change suggestion effect may be executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
The display mode of the specific display may be changed more easily when the specific effect is executed than when the special effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
A special effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a zone effect of a chance zone) different from the specific effect is provided.
When the special effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific effect is executed.
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (see, for example, FIG. 10-7).
With such a configuration, the production becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also display a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display, and can control a game machine in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, pachinko gaming). Machine 1), the change effect executing means for changing the display mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) and the specific effect (for example, display change). A specific effect executing means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a zone effect of a high probability zone, and a special effect (for example, a chance zone) different from the specific effect. The special effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing the zone effect) is provided, and the specific effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed, and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change when the specific effect is executed than when the special effect is executed. Is easy to change, and the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is a display mode more than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. Is liable to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display), and moreover, there are a plurality of different advantages for the player. A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, 1 to 6) (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value changing process in step S6A) and a specific period of time. An effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect is provided, and the effect executing means makes a suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. After that, as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing, the first suggestion effect that continuously gives suggestions regarding the control of the advantageous state and the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state are continuously performed, and the setting means of the setting means. With the second suggestion effect that makes suggestions about the setting Among them, a game machine capable of executing any of the suggestion effects (see, for example, FIG. 12-12) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the production will be diversified and the interest will be improved. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention can also display a specific display (for example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display, and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the gaming machine). In the pachinko gaming machine 1), a change effect executing means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) for changing the display mode of the specific display, and a specific effect (for example, A specific effect executing means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a display change high probability zone zone effect, and a special effect (for example, a chance) different from the specific effect. A special effect executing means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processes of step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing the zone effect of the zone) is provided, and the specific effect is executed when the specific effect is executed. , The display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed, and when the specific effect is executed, the specific display is displayed more easily than when the special effect is executed. The display mode is easily changed, and the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is higher than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed. The display mode is easily changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display), and the advantage for the player is different. Identification as a setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A). An effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect over a period of time is provided, and the effect executing means suggests control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. Of the first suggestion effect of ending the suggestion and the second suggestion effect of continuously performing the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing and suggesting the setting of the setting means. , Any suggestion effect can be performed (See, for example, FIGS. 12-13).

According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the production will be diversified and the interest will be improved. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after the specific timing, the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition to the suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect, the set value may be suggested according to the execution frequency of the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone). For example, it is set by deciding whether or not to execute the specific effect at each timing when the specific effect can be executed, and by making the ratio of determining the execution of the specific effect different depending on the set setting value. The more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is that the specific effect is executed. By doing so, when the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display changes, and the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player is improved. , The game entertainment can be further improved.
Further, in addition to the suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect, the rate at which the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has changed in the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone) further changes after the specific effect is completed. Therefore, the setting value may be suggested. For example, when the display mode of the specific display changes in the specific effect, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not the display mode is further changed after the specific effect is completed, and the display mode is further changed according to the set value. By making the ratio of determining the change to be different, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the more easily the display mode of the specific display may be changed. By doing so, when the display mode of the specific display is further changed, the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player is improved, so that the game interest can be improved. ..
Further, in addition to the suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect, after the change when the display mode of the specific display is changed in the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone) or after the specific effect is completed. By selecting the mode from a plurality of types by lottery or the like and making the selection ratio of each mode after the change different depending on the set value, the set value is advantageous to the player. , The changed mode may be more likely to be a specific type of mode. By doing so, the display mode of the specific display will be enriched after the change, and when the display mode is changed to the specific type, the set value is expected to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the hobby of the game.
Further, in this way, if the setting value is suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements such as a suggestion regarding the setting by the second suggestion effect and the execution frequency of the specific effect), the player can use the plurality of elements. When a favorable setting value is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, and a setting value favorable to the player is not suggested by a certain factor. Even in this case, if an advantageous setting value is suggested by other factors, the player can maintain the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer that executes a setting value changing process in step S6A) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. The effect executing means (for example, the CPU 103 of 100) and the effect executing means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing the suggestion effect over a specific period, and the effect executing means up to a specific timing in the specific period. After making a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state, as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing, a first suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state are provided. Among the second suggestion effects that are continuously performed and suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means, any of the suggestion effects can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 12-12).

Alternatively, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer that executes a setting value changing process in step S6A) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. The effect executing means (for example, the CPU 103 of 100) and the effect executing means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing the suggestion effect over a specific period, and the effect executing means up to a specific timing in the specific period. After making a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state, the first suggestion effect for ending the suggestion, the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing are continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed. Among the second suggestion effects, a gaming machine capable of executing any of the suggestion effects (see, for example, FIG. 12-13) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the feature portions of other morphological examples will be described.
(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park are provided in the setting changeover main body and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch that can perform an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game hall side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

11-1 (A) and 11-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 11-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 11-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one in which the first special figure and the second special figure use individual display result judgment tables, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different depending on each set value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is " The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. , The range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from ~ 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, among the hit determination values, as in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-1 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) while the gaming machine frame is open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round indicator are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold indicator 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in the state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Perform processing according to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It may be possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without the operation, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is being changed and the power is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 11-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1020. It may be determined whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is disturbed as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, the big hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, the value of the random number value MR1 is used when determining whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It may be judged whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature 66AK)
In the feature unit 66AK, the specific effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. The specific production is a production in which various notices and suggestions are given. The specific effect of the feature unit 66AK includes an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a feasible effect. There is.

FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 66AK. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step 66AKS011). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step 66AKS012). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 66AKS013). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step 66AKS012. It should be noted that the effect control pattern at the time of special figure change and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be. When the effect control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. (Step 66AKS014). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 66AKS015). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 66AKS013 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step 66AKS016). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and other hold numbers "2" to The hold display in the display area corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of reserved memories is "0", the hold display is not updated and the active display area is displayed. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 66AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 66AKS011 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step 66AKS021). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step 66AKS021; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step 66AKS022), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and refers to a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to for confirmation. Of the symbols, the right-determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the confirmation decoration is performed by referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. Among the symbols, the middle-fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left-right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and refers to a left-right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Further, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like and referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the final decorative symbol is determined. Of these, the middle-fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach-loss combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit confirmation symbol updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 It suffices to determine the decorative symbols having the same symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step 66AKS021; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step 66AKS023). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. When the variable display result is a "big hit", the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit. At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers.

The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. Following step 66AKS023, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS024). At this time, if it is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step 66AKS024; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated.

When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS024; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step 66AKS025). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS025, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 66AKS026). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step 66AKS026; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step 66AKS026; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step 66AKS027). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step 66AKS027, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS027, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step 66AKS028), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 12-3 shows a setting example regarding the reach symbol determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT01 shown in FIG. 12-3 is prepared in advance as the reach symbol determination table. In step 66AKS023 of the stop symbol determination process, the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT01 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT01, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols differs depending on whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", 80 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 and 70 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 2. 60 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 3, 50 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 4, and 40 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 5. Is assigned, 30 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 6, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. When the variable display result is "big hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 and 30 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 2. 3 40 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number of 4, 50 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 4, and 60 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 5. 70 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 6 and 80 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7.

According to the setting in the table 66AKT01 shown in FIG. 12-3, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4 As the number of, 5 and 6, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. When the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the numbers are 2, 3, 4, 4, 5, and 6. Therefore, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes higher, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and the numbers 6 and 5 As the number 4 becomes the number 3 and the number 2 becomes, the variable display result becomes "big hit" when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state decreases, and the number becomes 1. When the corresponding decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest.

FIG. 12-4 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 12-4 is prepared in advance as a setting suggestion effect determination table. In step 66AKS025 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT02 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT02, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "missing", 80 judgment values are assigned to "without effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 20 judgment values are assigned to "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect. Is assigned. When the variable display result is "big hit", 40 judgment values are assigned to "without effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 60 judgment values are assigned to "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect. Assigned.

According to the settings in the table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 12-4, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect is "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect. It will be higher than the decision rate of. When the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than the determination rate for "without effect" for not executing the setting suggestion effect. Further, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The rate at which the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol is low when the variable display result is "missing" and high when the variable display result is "big hit". As a result, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 12-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 12-5 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT03 shown in FIG. 12-5 (B) is prepared in advance as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step 66AKS027 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT03 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT03, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2, and the judgments are assigned to the pattern RE-1 and the pattern RE-3. No value is assigned (0). When the set value is 2, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. , Pattern RE-3 has no determination value assigned (0). When the set value is 3, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. The pattern RE-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 4, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. The pattern RE-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 5, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. The pattern RE-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 6, 35 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. Therefore, five determination values are assigned to the pattern RE-3.

In the feature unit 66AK, when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and 7 It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continued, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

In the feature unit 66AK, it is possible to execute so that the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1 in step 66AKS028 of the stop symbol determination process, so that the symbol display color is changed to copper. It will not be changed. In this way, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion effect is not determined in the pattern RE-3 in step 66AKS028 of the stop symbol determination process, so that the symbol display color is changed to gold. There is nothing to do. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

In the stop symbol determination process, when it is determined in step 66AKS024 that the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the set value may be specified in step 66AKS027, and then the process may proceed to step 66AKS025. In step 66AKS025, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined not only by the variable display result but also by a different ratio depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, it may be decided that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate as long as the setting value is advantageous to the player. When the reach symbol is determined to be the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the variable display result may be "big hit" and it may be confirmed that the game is controlled to the big hit game state. Even if the reach symbol is not a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be decided that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at different ratios according to the plurality of types of reach modes.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, these. It may change the production mode by any production device such as a combination of a part or all.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 66AKS012 of the variable display start setting process as the notice effect determination process. In the advance notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the effect according to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect type when the advance notice effect is executed are determined (step 66AKS041). In the advance notice effect, the presence or absence of the effect and the effect type are determined by referring to the advance notice effect type determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the advance notice effect type. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the advance notice effect type may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 66AKS041, it is determined to be either "no notice" in which the notice effect is not executed, or "step up", "character", or "title" in the case of executing the notice effect.

Among the notice effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a step-up notice corresponding to the "step-up" effect type, a character notice corresponding to the "character" effect type, and a "title" effect type. It suffices if the corresponding title notice is included. In the step-up notice, the effect mode in the advance notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, is changed stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages. The effect mode to be changed in the step-up notice is not limited to the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, but the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable effect for the effect. The operation of the members, or a combination of some or all of them may be included. In the step-up notice, after the effect according to the first effect mode is executed, it may end without changing the effect mode. In this embodiment, when the step-up notice is executed, in the display area of the effect image surrounded by the square-shaped outer frame of the predetermined display color while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. By the effect display in which the display contents (display mode) of the effect image showing the character are displayed in a switchable manner according to a predetermined order, the effect mode is changed to a plurality of stages and the effect is stepped up. The effect image displayed when the step-up notice is executed includes an outer frame partial image showing a display frame and an inner frame partial image used for switching display in a step change. The partial image in the frame may be a still image that is still displayed at each stage of the step change, or a moving image that is displayed as an animation at each stage of the step change.

In the character notice, an effect image showing a predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5. The character notice is a rate controlled to the jackpot game state according to the type, size, color, pattern, movement, dialogue, or a combination of some or all of these characters (big hit expectation). Is executed differently. In the title notice, a title with a predetermined character image is displayed on the image display device 5. The title notice is controlled to the jackpot game state according to the content, size, color, pattern, display timing, display period, display update speed, or the production mode including a combination of some or all of them. It is executed so that the ratio (big hit expectation) is different.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS041, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "no advance notice" is not executed (step 66AKS042). If "no notice" is determined (step 66AKS042; Yes), the notice effect determination process is terminated. If it is not "no notice" (step 66AKS042; No), it is determined whether or not "step-up" corresponding to the step-up notice is determined (step 66AKS043). When the "character" or "title" other than the "step-up" is determined (step 66AKS043; No), the effect pattern according to the "character" or "title" is determined (step 66AKS044). The effect patterns of the character advance notice and the title advance notice are a plurality of advance notices by referring to the advance notice effect pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the advance notice effect pattern. It may be decided to be one of the production patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the advance notice effect pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

When the effect type of the advance notice effect is determined to be "step up" (step 66AKS043; Yes), the number of steps pattern is determined (step 66AKS045). The step number pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice. The step number pattern can be selected from a plurality of step number patterns by referring to a step number pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the step number pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of steps pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In this embodiment, five patterns SU-1 to SU-5 are provided as a plurality of step number patterns, and the number of steps is any one of 1 to 5 according to each pattern.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS045, it is determined whether or not the pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046). When the number of steps pattern other than the pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; No), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. When the pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step 66AKS047). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step 66AKS047, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS047, the outer frame display pattern is determined (step 66AKS048), and then the advance notice effect determination process ends. The outer frame display pattern corresponds to whether or not to change the display color of the outer frame partial image when the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice reaches 5, and the outer frame display color when changing. It is a production pattern. The outer frame display pattern displays a plurality of outer frames by referring to the outer frame display pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the outer frame display pattern. It may be determined by one of the patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the outer frame display pattern may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 12-7 shows a setting example regarding the advance notice effect type determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT04 shown in FIG. 12-7 is prepared in advance as the advance notice effect type determination table. In step 66AKS041 of the advance notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the effect type are determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT04 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT04, the variable display contents are assigned to the production type and the like according to whether the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", "normal (loss)", "super (loss)", or "big hit". The number of judgment values is different.

The variable display content can be specified based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the display result of the variable display indicated by the variable display result notification command. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach mode, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display display result. Becomes a "loss". When the variable display content is "normal (loss)", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, and then the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "super (loss)", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and then the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "big hit", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the reach effect of normal reach or super reach is executed, and then the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit".

In the determination table 66AKT04, for example, when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect type of "character" or "title" is not assigned a determination value (0). On the other hand, when the variable display content is "normal (loss)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the production type of "character", and when the variable display content is "super (loss)", the variable display content is "super (loss)". 50 judgment values are assigned to both the "character" and "title" production types, and when the variable display content is "big hit", 70 judgment values and "title" are assigned to the "character" production type. 100 judgment values are assigned to the effect type of, and there is a judgment value assignment. 30 judgment values are assigned to the notice type of "step-up" when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", and when the variable display content is other than "non-reach (loss)". 120 determination values are assigned. In the production type of "Title", when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", no judgment value is assigned (0), and the variable display content is "super (loss)". ) ”, 50 determination values are assigned, and when the variable display content is“ big hit ”, 100 determination values are assigned. As a result, the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on whether the effect type is “step-up” or “title”. More specifically, even if the variable display content is other than "big hit", more judgment values are assigned to the "step-up" effect type than the "title" effect type, so the variable display content is Even in cases other than "big hit", it is easy to determine at a relatively high rate. On the other hand, as for the effect type of "Title", if the variable display content is other than "Big hit", only 50 judgment values are assigned when it is "Super (missing)", and "Step". Since a smaller judgment value is assigned than the effect type of "up", when the variable display result is other than "big hit", it is determined at a relatively low ratio. Therefore, when the title notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the step-up notice is executed. According to the same comparison regarding the presence / absence of the effect of the advance notice effect and the number of judgment values assigned to the effect type, when the title advance notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character advance notice is executed. .. When the character notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the step-up notice is executed. When the step-up notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the notice effect is not executed.

FIG. 12-8 (A) shows a configuration example of the step number pattern. In the plurality of step number patterns, the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice is different from each other. More specifically, the pattern SU-1 has a number of steps of 1, the pattern SU-2 has a number of steps of 2, the pattern SU-3 has a number of steps of 3, and the pattern SU-4 has a number of steps of 4. The number of steps of SU-5 is 5. In the step-up notice, the production by the first production mode becomes the production of the first step, and each time the production mode is changed thereafter, the number of steps increases by one step from the production of the second step to the production of the fifth step. proceed.

FIG. 12-8 (B) shows a setting example relating to the step number pattern determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT05 shown in FIG. 12-8 (B) is prepared in advance as the step number pattern determination table. In step 66AKS045 of the advance notice effect determination process, the number of steps pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT05 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT05, the determination result of the step number pattern is determined according to whether the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", "normal (loss)", "super (loss)", or "big hit". The number of assigned judgment values is different. By comparing the number of determination values assigned to each step number pattern for each variable display content, in the step-up notice, the jackpot expectation increases as the number of steps increases from 1 to 3. In the pattern SU-4 and the pattern SU-5, when the variable display content is other than "big hit", the determination value is not assigned (0 pieces). Therefore, in the step-up notice, when the number of steps reaches 4 or 5, it is determined that the jackpot game state is controlled. As described above, in the step-up notice, as the number of steps in which the effect mode is changed in stages increases, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state increases.

FIG. 12-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the outer frame display pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns SC-0 to SC-3 are provided as a plurality of outer frame display patterns. The suggestion contents of these outer frame display patterns differ depending on the outer frame display color when the number of steps in the step-up notice reaches 5 in the fifth step. The outer frame display color is the display color of the outer frame partial image displayed in the step-up notice, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to white, which is the normal display color. .. The pattern SC-0 does not change the outer frame display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern SC-1 changes the outer frame display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern SC-2 changes the outer frame display color to silver, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. The pattern SC-3 changes the outer frame display color to gold, suggesting confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the fifth step of the step-up notice, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the outer frame display color has changed and the outer frame display color after the change. ..

FIG. 12-9 (B) shows a setting example relating to the outer frame display pattern determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT06 shown in FIG. 12-9 (B) is prepared in advance as the outer frame display pattern determination table. In step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, the outer frame display pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT06 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT06, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the outer frame display pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2, and the patterns SC-1 and the pattern SC-3 are judged. No value is assigned (0). When the set value is 2, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. , Pattern SC-3 has no determination value assigned (0). When the set value is 3, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. The pattern SC-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 4, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. The pattern SC-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 5, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. The pattern SC-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 6, 35 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. Therefore, five determination values are assigned to the pattern SC-3.

In the feature unit 66AK, when the display color of the outer frame partial image in the step-up notice is changed, the effect mode is changed up to the fifth step in which the number of steps in the step-up notice is 5, so that the jackpot game state is controlled. It is confirmed that it will be done. If the outer frame display color does not change with the pattern SC-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and if the outer frame display color is changed to copper color with the pattern SC-1, the set value is set. Is determined to be 2 or more. Further, when the outer frame display color is changed to silver by the pattern SC-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the outer frame display color is changed to gold by the pattern SC-3. It is confirmed that it is 6, which is the highest set value. In this way, in the plurality of steps when the effect mode is changed stepwise in the step-up notice, there are a notification step for notifying that the game is controlled to a big hit game state such as a fourth step when the number of steps is four. It includes a suggestion step that suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a fifth step when the number of steps is five. Then, after changing to the effect mode of the fourth step, the effect mode is changed to the effect mode of the fifth step. Therefore, after the effect mode is changed to the notification stage, the effect mode is changed to the suggestion stage.

In the feature unit 66AK, it is possible to execute so that the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the outer frame display pattern is not determined to the pattern SC-1 in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, so that the outer frame display color is copper. It does not change to color. In this way, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to copper as the effect mode of the fifth step. different. If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the outer frame display pattern is not determined to the pattern SC-3 in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, so that the outer frame display color is gold. It will not be changed. As described above, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to gold is different as the effect mode of the fifth step.

In the notice effect determination process, when it is determined in step 66AKS043 that "step-up notice", the set value may be specified by step 66AKS047, and then the process may proceed to step 66AKS045. In step 66AKS045, the number of steps pattern may be determined not only by the variable display content but also by a different ratio depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the step number pattern may be determined so that the number of steps increases at a high rate as long as the set value is advantageous to the player. Even when the pattern SU-4 or the pattern SU-5 is determined, the variable display result may become "missing" at a predetermined ratio and may not be controlled in the big hit game state. Even when the number of steps pattern other than the pattern SU-5 is determined, the outer frame display pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-5, the outer frame display pattern may be determined at a high rate other than the pattern SC-0. In this way, when the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice is executed, even if it is possible to change to the effect mode that suggests the set value by a different ratio according to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode. Good.

The effect mode that suggests the set value in the fifth step of the step-up notice is to change the outer frame display color, which is the display color of the outer frame partial image, or to change the outer frame display color. In addition, the shape and pattern of the outer frame partial image, the shape and pattern and color of the inner frame partial image, audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED, for directing Any effect mode in the step-up notice, such as the operation of the movable member and a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed.

The plurality of outer frame display patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot game state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot game state is not controlled. For example, pattern SC-0 and pattern SC-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern SC-2 and pattern SC-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern SC-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern SC-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 12-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 66AK. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step 66AKS061). At this time, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and the variable display time is changed when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. It may be determined that the lapse has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 66AKS061; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating the effect movable member or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 12-10, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step 66AKS062). The advance notice effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the advance notice effect period is reached (step 66AKS062; Yes), control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step 66AKS063). When the step-up notice is executed by the control of step 66AKS063, the notice effect that changes the effect mode stepwise can be executed as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Further, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, it is possible to suggest the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by changing the outer frame display color to the effect mode of the fifth step in which the outer frame display color can be changed. ..

When it is not the advance notice effect period (step 66AKS062; No), or after the control of step 66AKS063 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step 66AKS064). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (such as the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 66AKS064; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step 66AKS065). By controlling step 66AKS065, for example, by executing the reach effect of normal reach or super reach, it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. Further, when the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state can be changed according to the reach symbol as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach effect after changing the symbol display color is executed to continuously suggest the control of the jackpot game state and pachinko. It is possible to make a new suggestion regarding the set value of the game machine 1.

When it is not the reach effect period (step 66AKS064; No), or after the control of step 66AKS065 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step 66AKS066). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. When it is determined that the change effect period is reached (step 66AKS066; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 66AKS067).

When it is not the change effect period (step 66AKS066; No), or after the control of step 66AKS067 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern is variable based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step 66AKS068), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

When it is determined in step 66AKS061 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 66AKS061; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 66AKS069). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 66AKS069; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step 66AKS069; Yes), the display result is obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) (step 66AKS070). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 66AKS071). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step 66AKS072), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 12-11 shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol with respect to the feature unit 66AK. Of these, FIG. 12-11 (A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 12-11 (B1) shows the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed. FIG. 12-11 (B2) shows the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. FIG. 12-11 (C) shows the execution period and execution timing of the advance notice effect which is a step-up notice. FIG. 12-11 (D) shows the execution period, the effect time, and the content of the effect according to the execution step for the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing T0, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach establishment in the reach mode at the timing T1, and the timing The symbol display color is maintained at the normal display color until the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed at the timing T3 via the reach development that shifts from the reach effect of the normal reach to the reach effect of the super reach at T2. In this case, when the reach is established at the timing T1, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as the reach symbol is controlled to the jackpot game state according to which of the numbers 1 to 7 corresponds to the decorative symbol. The rate of being done is different. In this way, by setting the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol to the decorative symbol corresponding to any of the numbers 1 to 7, it is possible to suggest the control of the jackpot game state.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, for example, after the reach development from the normal reach reach effect to the super reach reach effect at timing T2, the change effect is executed and the symbol display color is the normal display color. Can be changed to the suggested display color. However, in the case of the setting suggestion pattern RE-0, the symbol display color does not change even when the change effect is executed. When the change effect is executed and the symbol display color can be changed, the ratio of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol is controlled to the jackpot game state by the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. Is suggested to be high. In addition, when the change effect is executed, a setting value advantageous to the player is set according to whether or not the symbol display color of the reach symbol is changed and the suggested display color when the change is executed. The proportions are different. In this way, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the effect that can be executed in the period after the specific timing, such as the period after the timing T2 at which the reach effect of the super reach can be executed, is as an effect. By making it possible to change the symbol display color of the reach symbol by the change effect, it is possible to continuously give suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to suggest the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Since the reach symbol is stopped and displayed when the reach is established at the timing T1, it is possible to suggest the control of the jackpot game state by the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as the reach symbol in the specific period after the timing T1. .. Then, when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state until the timing T2 in the specific period. It is suggested that the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than that. After that, after the timing T2 in the specific period, when the change effect is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 depends on whether or not the symbol display color of the reach symbol is changed and the suggested display color when the change is performed. Suggestions are made regarding the set value of. Further, even when the change effect is executed, the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 as the reach symbol is continuously stopped and displayed, so that the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state can be continuously performed. In this way, when the reach effect of normal reach or super reach is executed, the reach effect of normal reach can be executed in a specific period from the timing T1 when the reach is established to the timing T2 when the reach is developed, and as a reach symbol. It is possible to suggest that the jackpot game state is controlled at a different rate depending on the decorative symbol displayed as stopped. After that, until the timing T3 when the variable display ends after the timing T2, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion that the jackpot game state is controlled at a ratio corresponding to the reach symbol is continued. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the suggestion that the jackpot game state is controlled at a rate corresponding to the reach symbol is continuously given, and pachinko is performed according to the symbol display color of the reach symbol. Suggestions regarding the set values of the game machine 1 are made. It should be noted that the period from the timing T1 at which the reach is established to the timing T3 at the end of the variable display is set as a specific period in which the reach effect can be executed. Suggestion to be controlled by the gaming state is given, and from timing T2 to timing T3, a big hit is given at a rate according to the reach symbol. A big hit is given at a rate according to the reach symbol. There may be a case where the suggestion controlled by the gaming state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is given according to the symbol display color of the reach symbol.

When the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice is executed, the step-up notice is started to be executed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing T0, the first step is in the period D11, and the step-up notice is in the period D12. It is the second step, the period D13 is the third step, the period D14 is the fourth step, and the period D15 is the fifth step. In this case, as a step-up notice, the display of the partial image in the frame changes stepwise from the first step to the fifth step. However, when the number of steps reaches the number of steps according to the determination result of the number of steps pattern, the execution of the step-up notice ends without changing the effect mode to be the next step.

In each of the first to third steps in the periods D11 to D13, the effect time is 1 second, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is executed at the timing T1 before the reach is established in the reach mode, and the jackpot is hit. It will be a big hit notice that gives suggestions regarding control of the game state. When the number of steps pattern is pattern SU-1, the first step in the period D11 is started, and when one second of the production time elapses and the first step in the period D11 is completed, the step-up notice is executed. Also ends. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-2, when the first step in the period D11 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-1, the display of the partial image in the frame is subsequently changed, and the period D12 When the second step in the above is started, one second of the production time elapses, and the second step in the period D12 is completed, the execution of the step-up notice is also completed. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-3, when the second step in the period D12 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-2, the display of the partial image in the frame is subsequently changed, and the period D13. When the third step in the above is started, one second of the production time elapses, and the third step in the period D13 is completed, the execution of the step-up notice is also completed.

The fourth step in the period D14 is executed after the production time is 5 seconds, which is longer than 1 second, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached in the reach mode at the timing T1, and is controlled to the jackpot game state. It will be a big hit confirmation that definitely notifies that it will be done. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-4, the reach is established at the timing T1 after the third step in the period D13 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-3, and then the partial image in the frame is displayed. When the fourth step in the period D14 is started by changing the display or the like, and the fourth step in the period D14 is completed after 5 seconds of the production time has elapsed, the execution of the step-up notice is also completed.

The fifth step in the period D15 is executed after the reach development in which the production time is 10 seconds, which is longer than 1 second or 5 seconds, and the transition from the normal reach reach production to the super reach reach production at timing T2. It is a jackpot confirmation that deterministically notifies that the jackpot game state is controlled, and in addition, it is a setting value suggestion that suggests a setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-5, as in the case of the pattern SU-4, after the fourth step in the period D14 is completed, the reach is developed at the timing T2, and then the partial image in the frame is displayed. The fifth step in the period D15 is started by changing the display and the like. At this time, depending on whether the outer frame display pattern is pattern SC-0 to pattern SC-3, whether or not to change the outer frame display color as the display mode of the outer frame partial image, or when changing the display mode. Suggested display color is different. When 10 seconds of the effect time elapses from the start of the fifth step in the period D15 and the fifth step in the period D15 ends in this way, the execution of the step-up notice also ends.

Since the step-up notice can change the production mode up to the third step before the reach is established at the timing T1, in the specific period after the timing T0 at which the step-up notice can be executed, the period up to the timing T1 Depending on whether the execution of the step-up notice is completed or the step-up notice is continued until the next step, it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 4 or more, the fourth jackpot confirmation is notified as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state in the period D14 included from the timing T1 to the timing T2 in the specific period. It can be changed to the effect mode of the step. Further, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, the outer frame corresponding to the outer frame display pattern is suggested as a suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the period D15 included after the timing T2 in the specific period. It can be changed to the effect mode of the fifth step, which is the display color.

If the number of steps pattern corresponds to any of patterns SU-1 to SU-4 and the number of steps is less than 5, step up before changing to the effect mode of the fifth step in the period D15. Execution of the notice ends. Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed, there is a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is given up to the timing T2 in the specific period corresponding to the number of steps less than 5, and then the suggestion is terminated. ing. On the other hand, when the number of steps pattern corresponds to the pattern SU-5 and the number of steps is 5, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed by changing to the effect mode of the fifth step in the period D15. Make suggestions about. Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed, the effect that can be executed after the timing T2 after the control related to the control of the jackpot gaming state is performed up to the timing T2 in the specific period corresponding to the number of steps of 5. This includes a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is given.

When the advance notice effect of the step-up notice is executed, the effect mode is changed from the first step to the third step in a specific period from the timing T0 when the variable display is started to the timing T1 when the reach is established. It is possible to suggest that the jackpot game state is controlled at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the effect mode is changed. After that, until the timing T2, which is the reach development after the timing T1, it can be suggested that the jackpot game state is controlled by changing to the effect mode of the fourth step. Further, it is suggested that the jackpot game state will be controlled if the effect mode of the fifth step is changed until the timing T3 at which the variable display ends after the timing T2, and the outer frame of the outer frame partial image Suggestions regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made according to the display color. The period from the timing T0 at which the variable display is started to the timing T3 at which the variable display ends is set as a specific period in which the advance notice effect that is a step-up notice can be executed. It is suggested that the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the mode is changed, and the suggestion ends without changing to the effect mode of the fifth step until the timing T3 after the timing T2. A case may be provided in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed by changing to the effect mode of the fifth step, and the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed according to the effect mode of the fifth step. ..

In the step-up notice, each step from the first step to the third step has an effect time of 1 second, the fourth step has an effect time of 5 seconds, and the fifth step has an effect time of 10 seconds. In the step-up notice, there are a plurality of stages in which the production mode is changed step by step, a notification stage for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled as in the fourth step, and a pachinko gaming machine 1 as in the fifth step. It includes a suggestion stage that gives suggestions regarding the set value of. Since the effect time of the fifth step is set to be longer than the effect time of the fourth step, the suggestion stage has a longer execution period than the notification stage. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on member registration-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even when they are disadvantageous (disadvantageous productions), since they do not motivate the photographer, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will be uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, in the feature unit 66AK, the execution period for the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period for the unfavorable effect is shorter than that for the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. In the step-up notice of the feature unit 66AK, the production time of the fourth step, which is the big hit confirmation, is longer than the production time from the first step to the third step, which is the big hit notice. In addition, the effect time of the fifth step, which is a suggestion of the set value when the big hit is confirmed, is longer than the effect time of the fourth step. As a result, when the effect mode is changed to the fifth step of suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it and to secure the shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

The effect time of the fifth step in the step-up notice may be different depending on a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. For example, pattern RE-0 has an effect time of 3 seconds, pattern RE-1 has an effect time of 7 seconds, pattern RE-2 has an effect time of 12 seconds, and pattern RE-3 has an effect time of 15. The production time corresponding to each pattern may be set so as to be seconds. As described above, the execution period of the effect may be different depending on the effect mode when suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the case of the production mode having a high advantage for the player, the execution period may be longer than in the case of the production mode having a low advantage for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect when the effect mode is changed to suggest that the set value is advantageous, and it is possible to secure the shooting time.

In the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the symbol display color which is the display color of the reach symbol. In the fifth step of the step-up notice, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the outer frame display color which is the display color of the outer frame partial image. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the fifth step of the step-up notice, at least a part such as the target image whose display color can be changed, such as the symbol display color and the outer frame display color. It is possible to make suggestions regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to different production modes. On the other hand, both the symbol display color and the outer frame display color can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set according to a production mode in which at least a part is common. It would be good if we could make suggestions about the value. The symbol display color and the outer frame display color may be changed to suggestion display colors different from each other. Alternatively, the symbol display color may be changed in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, while the effect mode other than the display color may be changed in the fifth step of the step-up notice. In the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to change the effect mode other than the symbol display color, while in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the outer frame display color may be changed. In the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the effect mode other than the symbol display color may be changed, and in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the effect mode other than the display color may be changed. In these cases, it suffices that the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the fifth step of the step-up notice can give suggestions regarding the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in all different production modes.

The setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol may be executed at a timing different from the fifth step of the step-up notice. For example, after executing the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the effect mode may be changed to correspond to the fifth step of the step-up notice. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol may be executed after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the fifth step of the step-up notice. As described above, after the specific timing in the specific period, suggestions regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made at a plurality of timings. In this case, the execution mode of the suggestion effect at another timing may be different depending on the execution mode of the suggestion effect at one timing. As an example, depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the ratio of whether or not the effect mode is changed up to the fifth step may be different in the step-up notice. When the suggestion effect is executed at the timing of 1, it may be restricted so that the suggestion effect at the other timing is not executed. For example, when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, a determination value in the determination table may be set as the step number pattern of the step-up notice so that the pattern SU-5 is not determined. .. With such a setting, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, while the setting suggestion using the reach symbol is used. Within the range in which the effect is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the effect mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a high rate within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. Within this range, a limit may be provided as a limit for changing the effect mode up to the fifth step at a low rate. Alternatively, the relationship between the range and the limit may be interchanged. That is, in the step-up notice, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed while the effect mode can be changed up to the fifth step at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. As long as it is not done, there may be a limit as a limit that the effect mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a high rate within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. As long as it is not done, there may be a limit as a limit of changing the effect mode up to the fifth step at a low rate.

Regarding the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the same restrictions as in the case of the step-up notice may be provided. For example, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the fifth step. As long as it is allowed, there may be a limit as a limit that it is not executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a high rate within the range in which the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the fifth step. As long as it is allowed, a limit may be set as a limit that enables execution at a low rate. Alternatively, the relationship between the range and the limit may be interchanged. That is, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step. As long as it is not allowed, a limit may be set as a limit that it is not executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a high rate within the range in which the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step. As long as it is not allowed, a limit may be set as a limit that enables execution at a low rate.

In addition to the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the fifth step in the step-up notice, multiple suggestion effects are executed at multiple timings for any suggestion effect that can suggest the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When possible, the execution mode of the suggestion effect at another timing may be different depending on the execution mode of the suggestion effect at one timing. Further, regarding any suggestion effect capable of suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a plurality of suggestion effects can be executed at a plurality of timings, the suggestion effect at one timing is performed at another timing. There may be restrictions on the suggestion effect.

FIG. 12-12 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol. FIG. 12-12 (A) shows an effect execution example 66AK101 in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. At this time, the reach is established by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 12-12 (B) shows an effect execution example 66AK102 in the case where the reach effect of the normal reach is the reach development that shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. At this time, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 12-12 (C) shows an effect execution example 66AK103 when the change effect is executed. At this time, the effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the effect image that notifies a message such as "design display color change !!" is displayed. Suggestions are made to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 12-12 (D1) shows an effect execution example 66AK111 in which the symbol display color does not change, corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-0. FIG. 12-12 (D2) shows an effect execution example 66AK112 in which the symbol display color is changed to copper color corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is pattern RE-1. FIG. 12-12 (D3) shows an effect execution example 66AK113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-2. FIG. 12-12 (D4) shows an effect execution example 66AK114 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-3. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-0, the display color of the reach pattern does not change as in the effect execution example 66AK111, and the normal display color of red is not changed. As a result, a failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-1, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper as in the effect execution example 66AK112, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-2, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver as in the production execution example 66AK113, so that it is highly expected that the setting value is advantageous for the player. Suggest. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-3, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold as in the effect execution example 66AK114, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

FIG. 12-13 shows an execution example of a notice effect which is a step-up notice. FIG. 12-13 (A) shows an effect execution example 66AK201 in the first step of the step-up notice. FIG. 12-13 (B) shows an effect execution example 66AK202 in the second step of the step-up notice. FIG. 12-13 (C) shows an effect execution example 66AK203 in the third step of the step-up notice. FIG. 12-13 (D) shows an effect execution example 66AK204 in the fourth step of the step-up notice. 12-13 (E1) to (E4) show production execution examples 66AK 211-66AK214 in the fifth step of the step-up notice. In the effect execution examples 66AK2001 to 66AK204, the effect mode is changed stepwise by sequentially switching the characters displayed by the partial image in the frame corresponding to the first step to the fourth step. In the effect execution example 66AK 211-66AK214, the character displayed by the partial image in the frame is switched to all the characters displayed from the first step to the fourth step corresponding to the fifth step, so that the effect mode is changed. Change.

Further, in the effect execution example 66AK 211-66AK214, the display color of the outer frame partial image can be changed corresponding to the outer frame display pattern. In the effect execution example 66AK211 shown in FIG. 12-13 (E1), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-0, the outer frame display color does not change, and the normal display color remains red. As a result, a failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example 66AK212 shown in FIG. 12-13 (E2), the set value is 2 or more because the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-1 and the outer frame display color is changed to copper. Suggests confirmation of that. In the effect execution example 66AK213 shown in FIG. 12-13 (E3), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-2, and the outer frame display color is changed to silver, so that the set value is advantageous for the player. It suggests that a certain degree of expectation is high. In the effect execution example 66AK214 shown in FIG. 12-13 (E4), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-3, and the outer frame display color is changed to gold, which is the highest set value of 6. Suggest confirmation.

In general, it becomes difficult to further raise the expectation of the player after the notification controlled to the jackpot game state is performed. On the other hand, the feature unit 66AK makes a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and then after a specific timing of the specific period, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice. By providing a case where a suggestion regarding a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set even after the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state is performed. As expected, the production can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed, the suggestion regarding the set value according to the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice may not be executed. Alternatively, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, the suggestion regarding the set value according to the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice may be feasible.

The chance-up effect may be executed together with the step-up advance notice effect, the character advance notice effect, the title advance notice effect, or in place of a part or all of them. In the chance-up effect, a character appears on the image display device 5 during the reach effect, and the content of the character's dialogue suggests a big hit expectation. In addition, the effect mode of the chance-up effect may be any effect mode that can suggest the jackpot expectation to the player, and may not be the effect that suggests the jackpot expectation depending on the character's dialogue content.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process. When the variable display result is a big hit, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the chance-up effect is executed are based on the fact that the variable display result is a big hit and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. And decide. If the variable display result is lost, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the chance-up effect is executed are based on the fact that the variable display result is lost and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. And decide.

FIG. 12-14 shows a setting example of an effect pattern that can be determined when the chance-up effect is executed. In this setting example, four patterns CU-1 to CU-4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined when the chance-up effect is executed. The pattern CU-1 is an effect pattern indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (big hit expectation: low), and the pattern CU-2 has a jackpot expectation higher than that of the pattern CU-1 (big hit expectation: high). It is a production pattern showing that. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are both effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, but the effect modes are different.

FIG. 12-15 (A) shows a setting example of a ratio for determining whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the variable display result is executed when the variable display result is a big hit. In this determination example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 39%, and the chance-up effect is pattern CU- at a rate of 10%. Decided to execute at 1 and decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 1%. If the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 38%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 2%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 37%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 3%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 36%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 4%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 35%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 5%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. If the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 34%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 6%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4.

FIG. 12-15 (B) shows a setting example of a ratio for determining whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the variable display result is executed when the variable display result is lost. In this determination example, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 40% with the pattern CU-1. Decided to do, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 10%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 0%, 0% It is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 at the ratio of.

By setting such a determination ratio, among the cases where the chance-up effect is executed, when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-1, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state is low (the jackpot expectation is low). ), And when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high (the jackpot expectation is high). When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, it is always controlled to the big hit game state. The ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-3 is the same regardless of the set value (uniformly 10%), whereas the ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-4 is the set value. Is set to increase as the value increases. Therefore, the total of the ratio of the chance-up effect executed by the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of the chance-up effect executed by the pattern CU-4 differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and in particular, the chance-up effect is different. The set value is suggested by the ratio at which the effect is executed in the pattern CU-4.

As shown in FIG. 12-15 (A), the determination ratio of the chance-up effect for notifying the control of the jackpot gaming state as in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 is when the set value is 1. Is 11%, when the set value is 2, 12%, when the set value is 3, 13%, when the set value is 4, 14%, when the set value is 5, 15%, and when the set value is 6. Is 16%, which differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, and the pachinko game machine It is set to increase as the set value set to 1 increases.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (chance-up effect control patterns) is selected and set as a usage pattern in response to the case where the execution of the chance-up effect is decided. You may. Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the chance-up effect process timer, it may be possible to execute the chance-up effect according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table of the chance-up effect is set, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is updated every time the variable display effect process is executed, and the effect device (image display device 5 or) is updated according to the updated timer value. The chance-up effect may be executed by controlling the speakers 8L, 8R, the effect lamp 9 and the like).

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 is the effect pattern for the jackpot notification when the chance-up effect is executed. When it is determined that the effect pattern is the jackpot notification, whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern when the set value suggestion effect is executed are determined based on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

FIG. 12-16 shows a setting example of an effect pattern that can be determined when the set value suggestion effect is executed. In this setting example, five effect patterns SS-1 to effect patterns SS-5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined when the set value suggestion effect is executed. The pattern SS-1 suggests that the set values may be odd (eg 1, 3, 5), and the pattern SS-2 suggests that the set values may be even (eg 2, 4, 6). Suggesting that pattern SS-3 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the odd-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 3 or 5). 4 or 6) suggests that the pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg 6).

Pattern SS-1 and pattern SS-2 are determined at a high ratio when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, the set value is 5 or 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation of being present is low, and the pattern SS-3 and the pattern SS-4 are set values 5 and 6 by being determined at a high ratio when the set value is any of 5 and 6. It is said that there are high expectations for this. Here, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings, and the set values 1 may be set. 2 may be set to a low setting, setting values 3 and 4 may be set to an intermediate setting, and setting values 5 and 6 may be set to a high setting to set the execution ratio of the effect pattern.

FIG. 12-17 shows a setting example of a ratio for determining whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern when the set value suggestion effect is executed. In this setting example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 7.15%. Was decided to be executed in the pattern SS-1, and the set value suggestion effect was decided to be executed in the pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.35%, and the set value suggestion effect was patterned at a rate of 0.36%. Decided to execute on SS-3, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect on pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.14%, and set value suggestion effect on pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. Decide to do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 85%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 3.21%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 10.73%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.21%. Decided to perform the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.85%, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 11.45%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.85%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 4.28%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 1.42%, and it was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 3.57%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 14.30%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 1.78%. Decided to do, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 5.35%, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 4.28%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 8.57%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 10.73%. Decided to perform the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6.42%, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 10.00%. Decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 5.00%, and execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 5.00%. It is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 12.50%, and the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 2.5%. To determine.

By setting the determination ratio in this way, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion effect is produced. Is executed in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4, which suggests that the set value is 5 or 6. Further, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined.

FIG. 12-18 shows the effect execution period in the variable display of the super reach when the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed. The chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect are effects that can be executed during the execution period of the reach effect during the variable display of the super reach. The set value suggestion effect can be executed after the chance-up effect when it is executed by the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 that notifies that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The set value suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying an effect image showing any or all of the plurality of characters on the image display device 5. is there. In addition, the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect may be any effect mode that can suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may not be an effect mode using a plurality of characters.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (set value suggestion effect control pattern) is selected as the usage pattern in response to the case where the execution of the set value suggestion effect is decided. You may set it. Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the set value suggestion effect process timer, it may be possible to execute the set value suggestion effect according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table of the set value suggestion effect is set, the value of the set value suggestion effect process timer is updated every time the variable display effect process is executed, and the effect device (image display device) is updated according to the updated timer value. 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect effect lamp 9 and the like) may be controlled to execute the set value suggestion effect.

When a predetermined period has passed since the reach effect of Super Reach was started, a character is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 as a chance-up effect, and character information that is different according to the effect pattern is displayed as a character line. Will be done. In particular, when the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, the variable display result is a big hit depending on the dialogue displayed on the image display device 5, and after the variable display is completed, the big hit game state is set. It is notified that it will be controlled.

If the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the reach effect of Super Reach, a plurality of set value suggestion effects are performed after a specific period has passed since the chance-up effect was completed. Images of any or all of the characters are displayed. For example, when the set value suggestion effect is executed in patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-4, images of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5. When the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 (when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode for notifying that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6) In the image display device 5, all the characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to which character's image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the setting value suggestion effect, and the player is also made to pay attention to the number of images of the character displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the game entertainment. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The chance-up effect is a chance by making it possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the player by the ratio of executing the effect pattern to notify that the pachinko game state is controlled. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to the up-production. The set value suggestion effect can be executed after the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, which is an effect pattern for notifying that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state during the reach effect of the super reach. Yes, the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect is set so that the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the execution rate. Therefore, the set value suggestion effect is executed after the chance-up effect. It is possible to attract the attention of the player and improve the interest of the game.

The specific suggestion effect may be a chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, or may be an advantageous state (big hit game) when the specific display result (variable display result is a big hit). In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) controlled by a state), if it is an effect of notifying that a specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state before being displayed (deriving display), the effect mode is particularly high. Does not matter. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled may be lower as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is larger. The special suggestion effect may be the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect, and the predetermined effect may be a set value suggestion effect having a different effect mode from the chance-up effect, but the special suggestion effect and the predetermined effect are the same. It may be an effect of an effect mode, or a special suggestion effect and a predetermined effect may be executed as a series of effects. As the predetermined effect having a different effect mode from the special suggestion effect, for example, it may be applied to an effect that does not necessarily notify that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, such as a reach effect of super reach. By making it possible to execute only the chance-up effect among the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect, it may be possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by the chance-up effect.

The chance-up effect is provided as an effect pattern for notifying that the two effect patterns of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are controlled to the jackpot game state, and the chance-up effect is provided by the pattern CU-3. The ratio of execution is 10%, which is common regardless of the set value set in pachinko game machine 1, while the ratio of chance-up effect executed in pattern CU-4 is set in pachinko game machine 1. It depends on the set value. Since the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested by the ratio at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4, the chance-up effect is the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-. It is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production by paying attention to the player depending on which of 4 is executed.

As the effect pattern of the chance-up effect, three or more effect patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled may be provided. Of the effect patterns that notify that the jackpot game state is controlled, only the execution ratio of some of the effect patterns may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or all the effects. The execution rate of the pattern may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After executing the chance-up effect with one effect pattern (for example, pattern CU-3) that notifies that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state, the other effect that further notifies that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. It may be feasible with a pattern (eg, pattern CU-4). In this case, the content to be notified to the player may differ depending on the number of times the chance-up effect is executed. For example, if the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 during the variable display of 1, only the jackpot game state is notified, and the chance-up effect is the pattern CU- during the variable display of 1. When 3 and the pattern CU-4 are executed twice, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set within a predetermined range (for example, 4 to 4 to 4) in addition to the notification that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It may be notified that it is in the range of 6). Whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1. Can draw the player's attention to. Further, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 depending on the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state during the variable display of 1. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is, and it is possible to improve the game interest. The special suggestion effect may be the chance-up effect to be executed first, and the special effect may be the chance-up effect to be executed later. When the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not have to overlap, and the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not overlap. At least part of it may overlap. When the special suggestion effect and the special effect are executed within a specific period, the execution period of the special suggestion effect and the execution period of the special effect do not overlap, and the execution period of the special suggestion effect and the execution period of the special effect. Includes both at least some of the duplicates. When the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, both chance-up effects may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. When the special suggestion effect and the special effect are executed within a specific period, both chance-up effects are executed during one variable display, and both chance-up effects are executed over a plurality of variable displays. Includes both of them. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1, a plurality of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects executed during the variable display of 1 are executed. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the plurality of variable displays. .. The pattern CU-3 is notified that it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example, 1, 2, or 6). That) is used as an effect pattern to notify, and the pattern CU-4 is notified that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is within a range different from that of the pattern CU-3. It may be an effect pattern for notifying that (for example, it is in the range of 4 to 6). In this example, the pattern CU-3 is notified that the set value is 1, 2, or 6, and the pattern CU-4 is notified that the set value is any of 4 to 6. It is determined that the value is 6. In this way, the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, so that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested more accurately. You may. When the chance-up effect is executed twice in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, whether or not the production periods of both chance-up effects overlap, and whether both chance-up effects are displayed. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested according to the length or the like in which the production periods overlap.

Instead of pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, chance-up effects can be executed multiple times with pattern CU-2, which is an effect pattern with high expectation for big hits, and these chance-up effects are executed with pattern CU-2. The suggested content may differ depending on the number of times it has been performed. Specifically, the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, the period from the reach to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display after the start of the reach effect of the super reach It is possible to execute the chance-up effect once for each period until the end (it is possible to execute the chance-up effect three times during one variable display), and if the chance-up effect is executed only once, a big hit is expected. It suggests that the degree is high, suggests that if the chance-up effect is executed twice, it will be controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the chance-up effect is executed three times, it is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be set to notify that the set value is in a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, so that the game interest can be improved.

Regarding the case where the suggestion content is different depending on the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, for example, the variable display result is specified at the start of the variable display, and if the variable display result is a miss or a small hit, a chance-up effect is produced. Is determined to be executed only once in the pattern CU-2. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is further specified. If the set value is any of 1 to 5, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern CU-2 is determined once or twice, and if the set value is 6, the chance-up effect pattern CU is determined. The execution at -2 may be decided to be one to three times. When the suggestion content is different depending on the number of times the pattern CU-2 is executed, the number of times the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is executed is first determined by lottery, and the variable display result or the pachinko game machine 1 is set. The number of executions may be redetermined according to the set value.

The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is, for example, the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the rate of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4. It is the total of the ratio of the chance-up effect to the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of the chance-up effect to the pattern CU-4, while being set to the pachinko game machine 1. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the player according to the execution ratio of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are the effect patterns for notifying the player that the jackpot game state is controlled. By suggesting this, you can improve the interest of chance-up production. It may be possible to execute a setting value change suggestion effect indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. In particular, when the setting value change suggestion effect is executed on the next day or the like when a low setting value is suggested by the chance-up effect or the like in the pachinko game machine 1, a high setting value is set for the pachinko game machine 1 for the player. Since it can be expected that the player is playing, the player's game can be promoted. The effect period of the set value suggestion effect may be set longer than the effect period of the chance-up effect. By doing so, as proof that the pachinko game machine 1 in which the high setting value is set has played a game, the period during which the player takes an image of the setting value suggestion effect with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone can be set. Can be secured. Further, in the case where the player secures the period for shooting the image of the set value suggestion effect by setting the effect period of the set value suggestion effect longer than the effect period of the chance up effect, the chance is further increased. After the effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, the effect suggesting that the set value suggestion effect is executed can be executed, so that the player who recognizes the effect suggests the set value. The mobile terminal may be ready by the start of the production. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 may be determined as the effect pattern of the chance-up effect only when the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is determined in the variable special figure.

The special suggestion effect may be an effect (so-called full rotation reach effect) in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a combination of big hits. When a pseudo-continuous effect that repeats the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbol can be executed, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbol up to the maximum number of times may be used as the special suggestion effect. For variable display that has not been executed yet. When the hold display notice effect that announces the variable display result in the display mode of the hold memory display can be executed, the display in gold or rainbow color of the hold memory display is a special suggestion effect. May be. In addition, special suggestions are given for light emission in a mode of notifying the jackpot of the game effect lamp 9, sound output for notifying the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of a specific movable body, or a combination of some or all of them. It may be used as a production. These multiple specials when it is possible to perform full rotation reach, pseudo-continuous production, hold memory display production, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8 and 8R, movement of the movable body, etc., which are special suggestion effects. Different setting values may be suggested by combining the suggestion effects and changing the effect mode of the special suggestion effect to be executed later. For example, after it is notified that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the revariable display are executed up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 4 times) as a pseudo continuous effect and controlled to the jackpot game state, the full rotation reach effect is executed. , As this full rotation reach effect, if the variable display direction of the decorative symbol is from above to downward, it is notified that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and as this full rotation reach effect, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. If the direction is from left to right, it notifies that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and as this full rotation reach effect, the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is an image display device seen from the player. You may notify that the set value is 6 as long as it is directed from the back side to the front side of 5. Alternatively, after it is notified that the game effect lamp 9 emits rainbow colors at the start of the variable display to control the jackpot game state, if the melody A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the set value is 1 to 1. If the melody B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the speaker 8L and 8R are notified that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and the melody C is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, it may be notified that the set value is 6. Alternatively, after it is notified that the hold memory display is displayed in rainbow colors and the variable display result corresponding to the hold memory display becomes a big hit (it is controlled to the big hit game state after the variable display ends), this big hit The movable body A operates by the end of the variable display to notify that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and the movable body B operates by the end of the variable display that becomes a big hit. By notifying that the set value is any of 4 to 6, the set value is 6 by operating both the movable body A and the movable body B by the end of the variable display which is a big hit. May be notified.

When it is possible to suggest the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in both the chance-up effect and the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value suggested in the chance-up effect and the setting value suggested in the setting value suggestion effect are individually indicated. If it is determined to be, it is conceivable that the contents of both suggestions do not match depending on the mode of the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect. Therefore, for example, when the execution in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 is not decided and the set value is not suggested in the chance-up effect, the set value may be suggested only by the set value suggestion effect. Often, the set value may be suggested in the chance-up effect, such as determining the execution in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 only when the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined. Whether or not the clerk of the game hall suggests the set value as a chance-up effect by using the effect adjustment function provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and the ratio of execution / non-execution of the set value suggestion effect can be changed. May be good.

In addition to the chance-up effect, the jackpot expectation may be suggested by an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect, and a suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made. The feature unit 66AK can be applied to any effect as long as it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. it can. For example, when executing an arbitrary effect, after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed. At the same time, it may include a case of suggesting a set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, when performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. It may include the case of making a suggestion about a value.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. Alternatively, the outer frame display pattern may include a pattern in which the determination ratio differs depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

Part or all of the specific period, or part or all after the specific timing in the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (such as the effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state for the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may be a suggestion about a probability change state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 66AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, 1 to 6. For example, a setting means such as the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the setting value change process in step S6A and a suggestion effect can be executed over a specific period, for example, which can be set to any of the setting values. It is provided with an effect executing means such as an image display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120, and the effect executing means is, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, until a specific timing in a specific period, for example, a decorative symbol serving as a reach symbol. After making suggestions regarding the control of the advantageous state, as an effect that can be executed after a specific timing, for example, when the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continued. The first suggestion effect to be performed and the second suggestion effect to continuously give suggestions for controlling the advantageous state and to give suggestions for setting the setting means, for example, when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. Of these, one of the suggestive effects can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing.

Alternatively, as a plurality of setting values that are advantageous to the player, for example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state, and have different advantages for the player, for example, 1. It is possible to set a setting value of any of 3 to 6, for example, a setting means such as CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the setting value change process in step S6A, and a suggestion effect can be executed over a specific period. For example, an effect executing means such as an image display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120 is provided, and the effect executing means suggests control of an advantageous state up to a specific timing in a specific period, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13. After that, for example, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is less than 5, the first suggestion effect for ending the suggestion and, for example, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, it can be executed after a specific timing. As the effect, one of the second suggestion effects, in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed, can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after a specific timing. Can be done.

The specific period may be included in at least the execution period of the variable display in which the reach effect can be executed, such as the period after the timing T2.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The reach mode of the variable display includes a plurality of types of reach modes having different ratios controlled in an advantageous state, such as a reach symbol with a decorative symbol corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7, and the effect execution means has a variable display reach. After becoming the aspect, the reach aspect may be changed to a specific aspect, for example, the symbol display color may be copper, silver, or gold.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The effect executing means may be capable of executing different forms of effect depending on the setting of the setting means, for example, an effect corresponding to patterns RE-0 to RE-3 which are setting suggestion patterns after a specific timing. ..
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The effect execution means changes the effect mode stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages, for example, a step-up notice effect, and as the number of stages in which the effect mode is changed increases, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state increases. The suggestion effect may be feasible.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

In the plurality of stages, there are suggestions regarding the setting of the setting means, such as the advantageous state notification stage for notifying that the control is controlled to the advantageous state, such as the fourth step of the step-up notice effect, and the fifth step of the step-up notice effect. A setting suggestion stage to be performed is included, and the effect execution means can change the effect mode to the setting suggestion stage after a specific timing after changing the effect mode to the advantageous state notification stage. As shown in 12-11, the setting suggestion stage may have a longer execution period than the advantageous state notification stage.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portion 66AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker , 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning openings, 11 Main board, 12
Production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay board, 20 ordinary symbol display, 21 gate switch, 22A, 22B start port switch, 23 count switch, 30 ball hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push Button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104,124 random number circuit, 105,125 I / O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can display a specific display corresponding to the variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A change effect execution means that changes the display mode of a specific display,
A specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect,
It is provided with a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the special effect is executed.
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed.
further,
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and
Equipped with an effect execution means that can execute a suggestion effect over a specific period
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until the specific timing in the specific period, and then continues to suggest the control of the advantageous state as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to execute one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect that continuously performs the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state and gives the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means.
A game machine characterized by that. It is a gaming machine that can display a specific display corresponding to the variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A change effect execution means that changes the display mode of a specific display,
A specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect,
It is provided with a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not executed.
When the specific effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the special effect is executed.
The specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in the display mode than the specific display in which the display mode is changed to the predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed.
further,
A setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and
Equipped with an effect execution means that can execute a suggestion effect over a specific period
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then terminates the suggestion, and a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing. It is possible to execute any of the second suggestion effects that are continuously performed and that suggest the setting of the setting means.
A game machine characterized by that.